JP2018183318A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by enhancing a degree of attention to a jackpot game and interest in the jackpot game.SOLUTION: In a game machine 10, a super-ready-to-win performance in which a performance character is mainly displayed three-dimensionally from among a plurality of characters, a special-ready-to-win performance, and the like are executed in a pattern display part 341 as variation game performances. In the game machine 10, a performance character performance to a performance character in a performance executed at variation stop timing of a main character on the pattern display part 341 in a variation game is executed in at least one of an opening and one round of a jackpot game as a jackpot game performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  In general, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various characters appear on a display such as a liquid crystal display as an effect for a variable game in a normal gaming state. In addition, as an effect during the jackpot game, there is a display that displays a still image such as a character introduction image in addition to a video such as a PV (promotion video) of the character appearing in the effect in the variable game (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP, 2006-47392, A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of attention to the jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in a jackpot game and the interest of the jackpot game and improve the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image effect (variable game effect) is executed in the notification game that notifies the determination result, and a special game image effect (a jackpot game effect) is executed in the special game;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image effect and the special game image effect;
With
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games (round game) that shift to the player after the opening and give a game value (game ball) to the player,
The notification game image effect is an effect character such as a notification game specific effect main image effect (a super reach effect, a special reach effect, etc.) in which a specific effect agent (effect character) is mainly displayed among a plurality of effect agents (characters). Production)
The special game image effect includes a special game specific effect subject image effect (effect character effect) in which the specific effect subject is displayed in an active manner,
The effect execution means (51) is configured to notify that the opportunity game image effect that has been executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game state when the state is shifted to the special game state. In the case of a game specific effect main image effect, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first unit game executed first in the plurality of unit games. .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can raise the attention degree to a jackpot game and the interest of a jackpot game, and can improve a player's jackpot game willingness can be provided.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of a game board when the movable accessory member of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is in a standby position. The front view which shows an example of a game board in case a movable accessory member exists in an operation position. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st pending | holding command setting process performed by the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variable game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed by the change game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the time chart of the jackpot game performed with the gaming machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the opening / closing execution mode control process performed by the jackpot game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the operation data table which shows the relationship between a detection pattern and an operation condition. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows the example of a transfer of the display screen in the symbol display part in the game setting process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the display screen in the symbol display part in the game setting process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game start standby process performed by the game setting process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process performed by the game setting process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process performed by the game setting process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the character selection screen process performed by the game setting process of FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table referred when the fluctuation | variation command is received in the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table referred when the fluctuation | variation command is received in the command determination process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed by the command determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R referred by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening-and-closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R referred by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process performed by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect scenario determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 and a round game that executes a visual hindrance effect, and (B) shows an example of a round game effect screen. Figure. The figure which shows an example of the promotion effect performed as a visual recognition inhibition effect by jackpot game effect. The figure which shows an example of the reservation extended reservation confirmation effect performed as visual recognition inhibition effect by jackpot game effect. The figure which shows an example of the specific number appearing ball display effect performed as a visual recognition impediment in a jackpot game effect. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of error processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of error processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the error display performed as a visual recognition impediment in a jackpot game effect. The flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot game effect process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of a game display effect process executed in the jackpot game process of FIG. 44. FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the round game effect process performed by the jackpot game process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table referred by the jackpot game effect determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R referred by the jackpot game effect determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the visual inhibition effect determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the error process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the error display in the symbol display part in the error processing of FIG. The figure which shows the other example of the error display in the symbol display part in the error processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the error process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the jackpot game character effect data table referred by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table referred in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the jackpot game character effect data table referred by the jackpot game effect determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the jackpot game character effect data table referred by the jackpot game effect determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game display effect process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5Rs referred by the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening-and-closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R referred in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG.

  Hereinafter, the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for the understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are examples embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 and 5 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. FIG. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and upper-lower expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. The outer frame 14 is fixed and installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, other examples such as a spinning cylinder gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a ballball gaming machine are used. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determination unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 6) that switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). This operation button 20 is, for example, a promotion effect as a visual hindrance effect described later (FIG. 38), such as an operation button effect that is executed in response to an operation on the operation button 20 by a player in a predetermined specific period in the variable game effect. It is operated to execute (see). The operation button 20 is operated to shift the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 described later from the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B). The

  Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate the operation button 20. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player.

  Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by a player of the touch key may be provided. Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the variable game effect.

  The selection determination unit 21 is operated by a player, and is a push button that receives a pressing operation of the player in a game setting process (see FIG. 23) described later. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

  The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to temporarily select desired items from options (items) such as the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) in the game setting process. An upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214 are included. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 has an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d (FIG. 6) for switching an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later. See). Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine the operation state (with or without operation) of each of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

  On the other hand, the determination button 21B is operated by the player to determine the provisionally selected item. The determination button 21B includes a determination operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine the operation state (with and without operation) of the decision button 21B.

  Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21 </ b> A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21 </ b> B, a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives an operation by the player of the touch key may be provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21 </ b> A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21 </ b> B, it may be considered that a panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects a player's touch operation on the panel 25 are provided as operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214).

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by a player to launch a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a later-described game ball launching mechanism 32 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in one row. Used to guide to the game ball launching mechanism 32. In addition, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used for storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, such as a variable game effect process (step S1911 in FIG. 19), a jackpot game effect process (see steps S1912 and FIG. 44 in FIG. 19), and the like. In addition to executing a sound effect for outputting the sound at, a sound output for notifying that an error has occurred when an error occurs is performed. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the illumination part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs a lamp | ramp effect by lighting modes, such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first operating port 314, a second operating port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, An out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. After being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, or the variable winning port 316 are discharged from the out port 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323 as shown in FIG. 2. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeder 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 onto the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches a game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIGS. 4 and 5, the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 have openings through the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. Is formed. In addition, on the back side of the game board 31, game balls can be detected individually corresponding to the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, and the variable winning port 316. Entrance sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 6) are provided. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 6) that can individually detect the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the player hits the right.

  The entrance sensors 313a to 317a (see FIG. 6) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the entrance sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, detection of a game ball by the ball sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The incoming sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but may be any sensors that can individually detect incoming incoming game balls by other detection methods.

  Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the game ball can enter the second operation port 315 by opening the electric accessory 315 b, and the game ball can enter the second operation port 315 by closing the electric accessory 315 b. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable prize opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the variable prize opening 316. The opening / closing door 316b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the opening / closing door 316b is opened, it is possible to enter a game ball into the variable prize opening 316, and when the opening / closing door 316b is closed, the game ball is restricted from entering the variable prize opening 316. The

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of the game ball into the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 is detected by the entrance sensor 314a or the entrance sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. And the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display part 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of the game ball to the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the winning sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, and the number of winning balls when entering the first operating opening 314 or the second operating opening 315 is 3, and entering the variable winning opening 316. In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, a big win lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and 16R probability jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, open / close execution is performed in which a round game (unit game) in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated five times until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls or more are won in the variable prize opening 316 A gaming state including a mode. The 16R probability variable jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than the 5R jackpot game state. This is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31 </ b> A formed at a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol change display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 entering the ball. Various displays such as effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering means of the present invention. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is disposed, for example, at the upper part or the lower part, or the left part or the right part of the symbol display part 341. The sub display unit may be movable between a position covering the symbol display unit 341 and a position not covering the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub display unit may constitute the image display means of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols having numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. Note that sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-symbols and that there are nine main symbol types “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols vary along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the big hit lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”, the state where the main symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an active line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot Is done. The jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of main symbols on the active line, but is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, for example, “777” symbol combination arranged in an active line Is displayed, or a combination of the same symbols other than “777” is displayed on the active line. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, a state in which symbol combinations such as “333”, which are set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variation jackpot in the main symbol, are arranged in an active line is displayed. Alternatively, a state is displayed in which the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpots or 5R probability variation jackpots such as “777” and “333” are arranged on the active line. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination other than a combination of symbols indicating a probable jackpot such as “222” or “444”, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main symbols. A state in which combinations of the same symbols are arranged on an active line is displayed. When the lottery result is “out”, a state in which different combinations of main symbols are arranged on an active line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable game effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big win along with the symbol variation display in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, if a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R probability variation jackpot is given as a variable game effect. Or the suggestion effect which suggests that it is 5R normal jackpot is performed. In this case, in the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, when a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing the probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R normal jackpot is given as a variable game effect. The suggestion effect that suggests that is. In this case, in the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

  Further, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect is not displayed (in the non-game state), the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 is changed to the top menu screen 72 (FIG. 25 (B ))). Further, by operating the selection determination unit 21 (a plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and determination button 21B), the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 can be changed from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) to the character. It is possible to shift to another display screen that allows game settings such as the selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25D). In the present embodiment, a plurality of characters (specific selection subjects) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in a variable game effect by an operation on the selection determination unit 21 (a plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and a determination button 21B). It is possible to set a character to be selected from the characters (selection). Details of the character setting will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the first operation port 314 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when the act which tries to guide the game ball to the 1st operation port 314 illegally using a magnet is performed, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. Note that the magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable prize winning opening 316. Thereby, in the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode, when an act of winning a game ball exceeding the upper limit number in the variable winning opening 316 is performed, the cheating can be detected.

  The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 and on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the incoming ball sensors 314a and 315a and erroneously detecting the incoming ball of the game ball is performed, the illegal act can be detected. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example. Similarly, a radio wave sensor 36 may be provided in the vicinity of the special prize opening 319b.

  The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 disposed in the upper right part of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 displays a lottery result as to whether or not to release the electric accessory 315b in the main control unit 331 by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern) with the winning of the through gate 317 as a trigger. In the 7-segment display 372, a change display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the first operating port 314 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, a change display of the symbol is performed with the winning of the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the variable display hold number N and the hold number M generated by winning the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 are displayed by lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs.

  The movable accessory member 39 is a decorative member that can be operated in a predetermined manner in the gaming machine 10 and is generally also referred to as a “servant”. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 includes a predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) positioned above the symbol display unit 341 and an operating position set below the standby position (see FIG. 5). Can be moved along the surface of the symbol display unit 341. In the standby position shown in FIG. 4, a part of the movable accessory member 39 is exposed from the opening 31A, and most of the movable accessory member 39 is hidden around the opening 31A. Therefore, in the standby position, the visual effect of the image effect executed by the movable accessory member 39 on the symbol display unit 341 is hardly obstructed. On the other hand, in the operating position shown in FIG. 5, the movable accessory member 39 covers the central portion of the symbol display unit 341, and the visual effect of the image effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 is hindered. That is, the movable accessory act of moving the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the actuated position is an example of the visual hindrance effect of the present invention. The movable accessory member 39 is an example of the movable member of the present invention and constitutes the rendering means of the present invention.

  The movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. The gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Furthermore, the movable accessory member 39 may be a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, a member that can be transformed into two or more forms, and a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to covering a part of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 but may cover the entire display screen.

  Such a movable accessory member 39 is controlled so as to operate in an effect or the like for showing a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in a variable game. In particular, the movable accessory member 39 is operated as a confirmed effect indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a win, or as a chance-up effect when the probability that the lottery is a jackpot is high. There are many cases. Moreover, in this embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 is operated in a promotion effect and a reserved villa finalization effect described later in the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 39a that supplies a driving force to the movable accessory member 39, and a return detector 39b that detects that the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby position. Have The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 39 is directed from the standby position to the operating position in accordance with the rotation direction of the motor 39a. It is moved downward or upward from the operating position toward the standby position.

  The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39 c is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 39 c controls the motor 39 a according to the control instruction from the sound lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 39 c can acquire the detection result by the return detection unit 39 b and transmit it to the sound lamp control device 5. The motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. Main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. The MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. The input / output I / F 42 is connected to ball sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a ball entering the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, the second operating port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a. Judging. Further, the MPU 41 determines the presence or absence of fraudulent acts using magnets or radio waves based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Furthermore, an audio lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42.

  Then, the MPU 41 sends a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a variable prize to the voice lamp control device 5. Outputs commands such as oral winning commands, error generation commands, and error elimination commands.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is used in step S1612 in the variation start process of FIG. 15 based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. Set in The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery or the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command include a lottery result, a variation pattern in a jackpot lottery for the increased hold, when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in a hold storage area 412b described later when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (the first hold command shown in FIG. 11). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the hold command setting process.

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 when the reserved number N or the reserved number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process of FIG.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. It is set in step S1702 in the game control process. Since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, the sound lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command and starts the jackpot game. In addition to this, it can be grasped that the opening is started. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may be made aware of the opening being started by the opening command.

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is finished, that is, the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to another game state. In the jackpot game control process of FIG. In step S1723.

  The round game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the round information indicating the start of each round game and the round number of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, It is set in step S1813 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to grasp that the opening is ended by the round game start command and the opening / closing execution mode is started, but separately from the round game start command, an opening end command is set at the end of the opening, Alternatively, the opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of round games to be started at the time of starting the round game may be set, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The ending start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending starts, that is, the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the ending is started, step S1718 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. Set in

  The variable winning award winning command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that a game ball has won a prize at the variable winning opening 316. When a gaming ball wins at the variable winning opening 316, a winning ball command setting process ( It is set in step S1303) of FIG.

  The error occurrence command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that an error has occurred. When an error has occurred, the error determination process shown in FIG. 9 (step S1007) is performed as an error occurrence command corresponding to the type of error. ).

  The error elimination command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the error has been eliminated. When the error is eliminated, the error determination process in FIG. 9 (step S1007) is performed as an error elimination command according to the type of error. ).

  It should be noted that commands other than those described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a later-described main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 receives a main timer allocation which will be described later each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Suppose that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big win lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electronic role hold area 412c in the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and a setting of a variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot winning, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the outage type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the normal hit random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric charge 315b of the second working port 315 is set to the electric open state and the initial value setting of the normal win random number counter C4 are set. And a normal initial value counter CIN2 to be used. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value by the MPU 41 at short time intervals and the value returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 during the big win lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable and stops is referred to as a first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the seven-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first operation port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second operation port 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing processing according to the control program. A lottery counter 412a (a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a variable type counter CS1, etc.) is individually provided for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 includes the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

  Therefore, the big hit lottery for the variable game executed based on the success / failure information stored in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 and the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB In addition to the lottery result, the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be determined in advance.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operation port 314, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. Is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number in which the success / failure information is stored among the first to-hold areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number-of-holds N.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second operation port 315, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. Stored in the area. In the reserved number storage area NAB, the number of pieces of information that are stored in the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 is stored as the reserved number M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first operation port 314 is configured by a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4. In addition, it is possible to hold up to four pieces of success / failure information as winning histories of game balls to the second operation port 315, respectively.

  In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common with the first operating port 314 and the second operating port 315, and even in this case, up to a maximum of 8 It is possible to hold the success / failure information as the winning history. The storing process of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. This is a storage area used for moving the validity information stored in the. Specifically, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and there is no success / failure information in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, the success / failure information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  It should be noted that the difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. In another embodiment, the success / failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on the numerical information stored as the success / failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the third The success / failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is shifted to the first reserved area REB1, and the third reserved The success / failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 738, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is determined according to a low / high probability mode (first notification gaming state) that is a normal gaming state and a high probability mode (second state) that is a probability-changing gaming state based on a winning / non-winning table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411. Two types are set corresponding to the notification game state. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B, the number of random numbers in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode is a jackpot is two (373, 727), and the jackpot in the high probability mode. The number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the lottery is a big hit is 13 (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the two random numbers (373, 727) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but they may not be common. Further, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be discrete values but may be partially or entirely continuous values. Note that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411. FIG. 8C shows an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is 10 from 0 to 9, and the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots. Is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 5 to 4, and the number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 10 from 5 to 14. Yes, the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 to 15-19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability variation big hit in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation big hit in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. In other words, in the probability change short game state, the expected value of the game ball to be obtained when the lottery result in the big win lottery is set higher than the normal game state such as the normal short time game state or the normal non-short time game state. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the first operation port 314 that triggers execution of the first special symbol game by winning the game ball and the second operation port that triggers execution of the second special symbol game by winning the game ball. A separate distribution table is set for each 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type varies depending on whether the game ball has won the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, but the first special symbol It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability changing machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, a kind-two-mixer, or the like.

  Based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, “5R normal hit” It is determined whether it is “big hit” or “off”.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times is executed. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, the probability variation is a high probability mode (second notification gaming state) with a high probability of winning a jackpot after the jackpot game ends and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. Transition to short-time mode. The probability change time-saving mode is continued until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of 5R normal jackpot, the normal time reduction mode which is a low probability mode (first notification gaming state) with a low probability of winning a jackpot after the jackpot game ends and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. Is executed. The high-frequency support mode in the normal time reduction mode is continued until a preset number of times, for example, 50 or 100 jackpot lotteries are completed.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a jackpot lottery of a preset number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) after the jackpot game at the time of probability change jackpot is completed Is executed in the probabilistic short-time mode (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), and then the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from a short time mode to a normal time mode or a low probability mode in a variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place, the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state and the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the variable display stop result displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place. Specifically, the outage type table stored in the outage type table storage area in the ROM 411 causes a back-and-forth outreach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of outliers, ie, the reach other than before and after detachment where the final stop symbol is other than before and after the reach symbol, and the complete detachment where no reach occurs. Here, FIG. 8D is a diagram showing an example of the detachment type table. In the example shown in FIG. 8D, the random number value that becomes the front / rear out of reach is 0 to 8, the random number value that reaches the other than the front / rear out is 9 to 38, and the random number value that is completely out is 39. ~ 238. It should be noted that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game that wins a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, that is, a variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, “reach” indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to be between the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbols corresponding to the remaining one stop position are in a state of fluctuating. In addition, during the reach fluctuation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed and suggests an expectation level, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. Person-participation-type operation effect processing and the like are executed. In addition, during execution of these effect processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 is not displayed, and the display is reduced or enlarged.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented, for example, one by one within a range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination reservation area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 412c. For example, it is conceivable that the winning combination is made when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, and that the winning combination is lost when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines rough variation types such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach as the variation game effects. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process, which will be described later, is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, or a deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided individually for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. The probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIGS. 8E, 8F, and 8G are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table. As shown in FIGS. 8E, 8F, and 8G, in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern is previously set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery When the result is “out”, the type of variation pattern is specified by referring to the out variation table.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8E and 8F, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in a normal reach mode in which the variation display time is 30 s. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs variation display in a super reach manner in which the variation display time is 60 s. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display in a special reach mode in which the variation display time is 90 s, which is the longest. Note that the type of variation pattern is not limited to these. The probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach corresponding to the variation pattern “01”, and any one of the normal reach selected from the normal reach is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach corresponding to the variation pattern “02”, a plurality of types of super reach having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and any one of the super reach selected from the super reach is executed. The Super reach is a reach that has a longer variation time than normal reach and a shorter variation time than special reach, and has a higher probability (expectation) of winning a lottery in the big win lottery than normal reach, and wins a big hit more than special reach It is executed when the player is suggested that the probability (expectation) of playing is low.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach corresponding to the variation pattern “03”, a plurality of types of special reach having different characters and stories are prepared, and any one of the special reach selected from the special reach is executed. The Special reach is a reach that has a longer variation time than normal reach and super reach, and includes, for example, effects that develop from normal reach or super reach.

  The reach corresponding to the variation pattern includes a single operation effect in which a single operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, a continuous operation effect in which the continuous operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, a game There may be a player participation type operation effect such as a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8G, in the deviation variation table, the variation type for each stop type (rear / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) determined by the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between the counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of departure is reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth, any of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of departure is completely out of the range, either the variation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes variation display without reach with a variation display time of 7 s. When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 executes the variation display without reach with the variation display time of 10 s.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of departure corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display of the variation pattern in which the variation display deviates without a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed is stopped. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, the fluctuation display of the deviation pattern which stops with the symbol is displayed with a notice effect such as a character, a message or the like being displayed. Executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

  When the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is displayed. Input to the sound lamp controller 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” with a change pattern command “A” indicating “5R normal jackpot”. Any one of “A01” to “A03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “B03” is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “C03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 adds fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the fluctuation patterns are “01” to “05” before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. One of the following is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in the above are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces sound from the speaker 26 according to the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Turn off the light.

  Accordingly, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process for determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS <b> 1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably perform the big hit lottery. Moreover, since the details of the variation mode that is actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, various variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. The effect display is executed.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as a sound used for a variable game effect, a jackpot game effect, and a lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that a command is sent to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input, and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 when executing a later-described variable game effect and jackpot game effect.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5 change the variation pattern command, first hold command, second hold command, shift command, jackpot game start command, jackpot game end command, jackpot game start command, jackpot game end Commands such as a command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a variable winning award winning command, an error occurrence command, and an error elimination command are input. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to a speaker 26, an electrical decoration unit 27, and a motor driver 39c. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, the MPU 51 can operate the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) by controlling the motor 39a via the motor driver 39c, and obtain the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby state. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a, the upper selection operation switch 211a, the lower selection operation switch 211b, the left selection operation switch 211c, the right selection operation switch 211d, and the determination operation switch 21Ba are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation is performed on the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214), and the determination button 21B, and is executed by the symbol display unit 341 based on the detection result. It is also possible to control the game effect to be played, the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, and a jackpot game end command, an opening / closing actual mode start command, and an opening / closing actual mode end command input from the main controller 4 , A predetermined calculation process is executed based on commands such as a round game start command, a round game end command, and a variable prize opening prize command.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the variation pattern command, changes the variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination, variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 31B)), and An effect type (see FIGS. 32A to 32C) is determined, and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (step S2703 in the command determination process of FIG. 30). In step S2705, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command indicates a 5R normal jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed. When a variation pattern command indicates 5R probability jackpot, a combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability jackpot Is displayed and a combination of main symbols corresponding to 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability jackpot or 16R probability jackpot is displayed. When the MPU 51 includes information on the jackpot type in the variation pattern command, the MPU 51 stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512. When receiving the jackpot game start command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot game effect in the RAM 512. The stored information related to the jackpot type is referred to (see step S2804 in the jackpot game effect determination process in FIG. 33).

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, the opening used for changing symbols such as main symbols used in the symbol changing display of the symbol display unit 341, notice effect image, reach effect image, jackpot effect image, losing effect image, jackpot game effect A plurality of types of images such as an effect image, an opening / closing execution effect image, an ending effect image, a top menu image used in game settings, a game setting image developed from the top menu image, and a character setting image are stored. Note that images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, at least a reach effect image, an opening effect image, and an opening / closing execution effect image include a plurality of character effect images on which images of some or all of a plurality of characters prepared in advance are displayed. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of image to be used and the display timing, but also the change display time of change symbols. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Discharge Control Device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71 and an input / output I / F 72. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a driving unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stop member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out; A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the dispensing control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount of money that is lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. To be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 into the launch rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, thereby directing the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 determines that the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 32 increases as the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The applied voltage to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to increase.

  Furthermore, the launch handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops firing the game ball. Thereby, for example, the shooting handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

  The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by the power supplied from the power supply facility. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like receive a power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on startup processing, main processing executed after startup processing, periodically started main timer interrupt processing, and power failure. NMI interrupt processing and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, descriptions of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like are omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process are described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, for example.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S <b> 1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball to any of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and these counter values reach the maximum values. In this case, the counter value is cleared to zero.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning a prize to the first working port 314 or the second working port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the launch of. In addition, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is processing to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the game ball launch is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric combination 315b of the second operating port 315 based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. If the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. It is judged that. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that the normal symbol is won, and the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. It is judged that. When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through gate process, the MPU 315b opens the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win a game ball to the second operation port 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged in parallel.

<Step S1007>
In step S1007, the MPU 41 determines whether an error has occurred, and executes error processing to determine whether the error has been resolved when an error has occurred. When an error occurs, the MPU 41 sets an error occurrence flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON according to the error type, and sets an error occurrence command in the RAM 412. On the other hand, when the error is resolved, the MPU 41 sets the error flag corresponding to the resolved error type to OFF and sets an error resolution command in the RAM 412. Examples of the error include a ball clogging error, a dish full error, a magnet detection error, a radio wave detection error, a vibration detection error, an abnormal winning error, and a door opening error. A ball clogging error, a pan full error, and the like are classified as normal errors, and a magnet detection error, a radio wave detection error, a vibration detection error, an abnormal winning error, a door opening error, and the like are classified as fraud detection errors. The fraud detection error is positioned as an error that needs to be notified immediately after the error occurs, and the normal error is positioned as an error that does not need to be notified immediately after the error occurs.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operation port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the first operation port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106 if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes). On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 9, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 in FIG. 12). And the counter value of S1310) is acquired, and the count value is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the contents of the success / failure information before the success / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is determined to be the jackpot success / failure determination target in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 13, FIG. 15) described later. Confirmation is performed, and a first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operation port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the second operation port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S <b> 1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 obtains counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 9, and the variation type counter CS1 that is updated in the main process described later. Then, the counter value is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the success / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is the target of the jackpot success / failure determination process (S1408 in FIG. 13, FIG. 15) described later. The content is confirmed, and a second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 11, “first hold command” is read as “second hold command” and “hold number N” is read as “hold number M”. Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 of FIG. 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or miss), a variation pattern, and the number N of hold. .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 41 is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that can be set to ON in a gaming state transition process (step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12) described later. The high probability mode flag is set on when the MPU 41 shifts to the high probability mode, and is set off when the MPU 41 shifts to the low probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning based on the high probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 8B). Execute the determination of whether or not. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 corresponds to the jackpot winning based on the low probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 8A). Execute the determination of whether or not.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the count value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the MPU 41 determines that the count value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the count value read out from is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the count values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the success / failure information is stored in the third reserved storage area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 10, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 included in the success / failure information stored in the third reserved storage area RE3. The count value is read out. Of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4, the hold area in which the success / failure information is stored in step S1104 in FIG. 10 is determined by the value of the hold count N stored in the hold count storage area NA. Is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hold number N to the first hold command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize in which of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 the success / failure information stored in the first hold command.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the count value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of date, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  Note that the first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and the other is performed in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 12 described later that is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. After being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with this command, it is deleted. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1307 are executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 msec, for example, and the counter update process of steps S1308 to S1310 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the process of steps S1301 to S1307 to the next cycle. The

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits an output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, in the RAM 412, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a variable winning mouth winning command, an error occurrence command, an error cancellation command, and the like are set. If so, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S <b> 1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412. Further, when the MPU 41 determines that a prize is generated at the variable prize slot 316 based on the prize detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sets a variable prize slot prize command in the RAM 412. The variable winning award winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the main process. Thereby, the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 can display the number of game balls to be paid out (out of ball display) on the symbol display unit 341 in the big hit game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. Although details of the variable game control process will be described later, in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a change pattern command necessary for the symbol change display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 9, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1310. Based on these values, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result and variation display time of the jackpot lottery is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. Although the details of the jackpot game control process will be described later, in the jackpot game control process, a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316 by controlling the opening / closing of the open / close door 316b is performed a plurality of times. Run. Thereby, the player can acquire many game balls in the jackpot game.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the determination result of the big hit lottery in step S1604 in the variation start process of FIG. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 determines that the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state having an open / close execution mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency with a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode when the predetermined state is satisfied. Transition to a normal short-time gaming state that is a support mode, a normal non-short-time gaming state that is not a low-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode, or the like.

  For example, when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game with respect to the jackpot, and executes the jackpot game having the opening / closing execution mode. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. On the other hand, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game has ended based on whether or not the jackpot game end flag set to ON in step S1722 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended, the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state.

  Specifically, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R probability variation jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag set to ON in step S1607, S1608 or S1609 in the variation start process of FIG. In this case, the game state after the end of the variable game with respect to the jackpot is shifted to the jackpot game state by setting the jackpot game start flag to ON.

  In addition, after the jackpot game is over, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined game based on which of the above-mentioned 5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R probability variation jackpot flag, and 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON. Transition to the state. For example, when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation short gaming state. Further, when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the normal time short gaming state.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the gaming state flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the promiscuous short-time gaming state, and sets the time-saving mode flag to ON when the gaming state is shifted to the normal-time short gaming state. To do. Further, when the time reduction mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets a time reduction number (50 times or 100 times, etc.) set in advance as the number of executions of the variable game in the time reduction mode in the time reduction counter. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot flag that is set to ON among the 5R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, and the 5R normal jackpot flag. Set it to off.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the main display unit 37. By this display control processing, the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 execute the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the lottery result. Stop display will be displayed. In addition, by the display control process, each LED lamp blinks for a predetermined normal symbol variation display time in the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37, and the pair of LED lamps are turned on and off depending on whether or not the normal symbol is won. This is indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of the above. In the case of normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operation port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next main processing execution timing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing. If the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1308: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1308: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. Until the execution time of the next main process is determined during the remaining remaining time (step S1308: Yes), step S1308, step S1309, and step S1310 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1308.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, the variable game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the big hit game, and if it is in the big hit game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated and the big hit game is not in progress. In the case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, whether or not a jackpot game is executed is determined based on a jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 turns on at the start of the jackpot game and turns off at the end of the jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and transmits the jackpot game start command to the sound lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command in the RAM 412 and transmits the jackpot game end command to the sound lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed. If the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to Step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON in step S1614 in the variation start processing of FIG. 15 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the variation game processing is performed. This determination is based on the variable display flag set to OFF in step S1405.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If the MPU 41 determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop display the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( In step S1404), the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and the number of holds M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process when both the hold number N and the hold number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes). On the other hand, when either one of the hold number N and the hold number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the validity information stored in the hold storage area 412b. If the MPU 41 ends the process of step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a change display based on the success / failure information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the change game control process. Details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the holding number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0. If the holding number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. To do. On the other hand, when the number M of holds is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of holdings stored in the holding number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The success / failure information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success / failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the fourth reservation area REA4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is shifted when the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is shifted when both or one of the holding number M and the holding number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, the MPU 41 executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507 because it can be determined that the hold number N is not 0 when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No).

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the success / failure information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the validity information of the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the fourth reserved area REB4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time reduction mode flag set to ON in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12 is set ON, and sets the time reduction mode flag to ON. If it has been set (step S1508: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the hour / hour counter (step S1509). On the other hand, when the time reduction mode flag is set to OFF (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1512.

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the counter value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time reduction mode flag to OFF (step S1511), and the process proceeds to step S1512. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), the process proceeds to step S1512 without setting the time reduction mode flag to OFF.

<Step S1512>
In step S1512, the MPU 41 sets a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 is shifted in the RAM 412. The shift command set in step S1512 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the pending | holding symbol displayed on the symbol display part 341 are changed. When the process of step S1512 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and proceeds to step S1408 in FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, an example of the change start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag that is set to ON in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12 is set to ON (step S1601), and the high probability mode flag is set to ON. (Step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1602, and when the high probability mode flag is set to OFF (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
When the high probability mode flag is set to ON (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the execution information is currently stored in the execution area AE based on the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 8B). Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed (step S1602). On the other hand, when the high probability mode flag is set to OFF (step S1601: No), the MPU 41 is currently stored in the execution area AE based on the low probability mode determination table (see FIG. 8A). Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit / failure information is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed (step S1603).

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a big hit. If the result of the determination is a jackpot (step S1604: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is 5R probability variable jackpot based on the jackpot type counter C2 included in the validity information currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 8C). (Step S1605), it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit (step S1606).

  When the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag to ON (step S1607). The 5R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery of the success / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R probability variation jackpot. In step S1607, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the success / failure information. The 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set to off at the end of the variation start process. In addition, when the process of step S1607 is completed, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1611.

  When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to ON (step S1608). The 16R probability variation jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the success / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 16R probability variation jackpot. In step S1608, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the success / failure information. The 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to OFF at the end of the variation start process. In addition, when the process of step S1608 ends, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1611.

  When the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the success / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R normal jackpot. In step S1609, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot is also set based on the success / failure information. Note that when the process of step S1609 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

  The MPU 41 can determine the jackpot type based on the jackpot flag set to ON in any of steps S1607 to S1609, and can determine the number of round games (rounds) to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode. Judgment can be made.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a big hit (step S1604: No), the MPU 41 sets the off flag on (step S1610). The out flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the validity information currently stored in the execution area AE is out. In step S1610, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place is also set based on the success / failure information. Note that the off flag is set to off at the end of the variation start process. Further, when the process of step S1610 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the normal jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8E). Further, when the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8F). Further, when the out flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the out variation table (see FIG. 8G).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1611 in the RAM 412. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “ordinary big hit”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating “5R normal big hit” to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Any of “A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, the MPU 41 adds any one of “B01” to “B03” to which “B” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is 5R probability variation big hit is added. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” added to the variation patterns “01” to “03” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the variation patterns “01” to “08”. A command is set in the RAM 412. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 includes information on whether the front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, or complete out is included in the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 (step S1613), and sets the variation display flag to ON (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops after the variation display time set in step S1611 elapses, in the state of the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610.

<Steps S1615 and S1616>
In step S1615, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the detachment flag is set to ON. When the detachment flag is set to ON (step S1615: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the detachment flag to OFF (step S1616), and ends the variation start process. On the other hand, when the detachment flag is set to OFF (step S1615: No), the MPU 41 ends the variation start process.

  In the variation start process, the jackpot flag set to ON in steps S1607 to S1609 is not set to OFF, and these jackpot flags are set to the jackpot game control process (step S1305) in the main process of FIG. Is set to OFF when the round game number R corresponding to the jackpot type is set in step S1703 in this jackpot game control process.

[Big hit game control processing]
Here, an example of the jackpot game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1305 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game control process, a control for executing a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316 is executed a plurality of times. FIG. 17A is a time chart showing an example of a 5R jackpot game, and FIG. 17B is a time chart showing an example of a 16R jackpot game. Hereinafter, an example of the 5R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 17A and 17B, and then the jackpot game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the 5R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game include an opening, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending.

  The opening is a period from the transition to the jackpot gaming state until the opening / closing execution mode is started. In the opening, the symbol display unit 341 indicates, for example, the type of jackpot (number of rounds, whether or not it is probable) and the number of consecutive games is displayed, and the operation method of the launch handle 22 in the jackpot game Is instructed.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, the round game is executed as many times as the jackpot type. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, a 5R jackpot game is performed in which a round game is executed five times in the case of 5R probability variable jackpot and 5R normal jackpot, and as shown in FIG. In the case of a promising jackpot, a 16R jackpot game is executed in which a round game is executed 16 times.

  Here, the round game is a game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. In a round game, the variable prize opening 316 is closed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number or more (for example, nine or more) game balls enter the variable prize opening 316. In the present embodiment, an interval (for example, 1.5 seconds) in which the closed state of the variable prize opening 316 is maintained for a predetermined time is provided between round games in the opening / closing execution mode. That is, the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the order of round game → interval → round game → interval → round game ... → round game. However, it is not always necessary to set the interval in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, the variable prize opening 316 may be immediately opened immediately after the variable prize opening 316 is closed to substantially eliminate the interval, or a plurality of variable prize openings 316 are provided, and these variable prize openings 316 are alternately arranged. The interval may be substantially eliminated by opening it.

  Ending is a period from the end of the opening / closing execution mode to the end of the jackpot game. In the ending, the symbol display section 341 suggests or clearly indicates a game state that shifts after the jackpot game is over. However, in this embodiment, in the ending, there is no suggestion of a game state to be transferred after the jackpot game is finished, and the game state of the transfer destination, that is, the low probability probability short-time game state in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the low probability It is clearly indicated which mode is to be shifted to the normal time short game state which is the mode and the high frequency support mode. In the ending, generally, the symbol display unit 341 also displays information on the number of balls played, such as the number of consecutive jackpots, the number of balls played in the jackpot game, and the total number of balls played in the park.

<Step S1701>
Returning to the description of FIG. 16, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether the jackpot game start flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. Determine whether to start. When the jackpot game start flag is set on (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1702, and when the jackpot game start flag is set off (step S1701: No), the process The process proceeds to step S1706.

<Step S1702>
When starting the jackpot game (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1702). This jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 (step S2707 in FIG. 30, FIG. 33), and can start the jackpot game effect (FIG. 44). Steps S3201 to S3206).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 sets the number R of round games to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot flag set to ON in any of steps S1607 to S1609 in the variation start process of FIG. For example, when the jackpot flag is the 5R probability variable jackpot flag (step S1607 in FIG. 15) or the 5R normal jackpot flag (step S1609 in FIG. 15), the round game number R is stored in the RAM 412 as “5”. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is the 16R probability variable jackpot flag (step S1608 in FIG. 15), the MPU 41 stores the round game number R in the RAM 412 as “16”. As a result, the MPU 41 executes a round game with the number R of round games corresponding to the jackpot type in the opening / closing execution mode control process of step S1714 described later. Note that when the round game number R in the opening / closing execution mode is set, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot flag that has been turned on to off.

<Step S1704 and Step S1705>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot start flag to OFF and further sets the opening flag to ON (step S1705). The opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1706, which will be described later, and the MPU 41 grasps the timing for starting the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening flag.

<Step S1706>
In step S1706, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag set to ON in step S1705 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not opening is started. If the opening flag is set on (step S1706: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1707. If the opening flag is set off (step S1706: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1713. Transition.

<Step S1707>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S1706: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time at which the time measurement is started in step S1708, which will be described later, is being measured when the opening is started. (Step S1707). If the opening time is being measured (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1709. If the opening time is not being measured (step S1707: No), the process proceeds to step S1708.

<Step S1708>
In step S1708, the MPU 41 starts counting the opening time after starting the opening, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time measured in step S1708 is referred to by the MPU 41 when it is determined in step S1709, which will be described later, whether the opening is ended and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

<Step S1709>
In step S1709, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time at which timing is started in step S1708 has reached a predetermined time required for performing the opening. When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S1709: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1710, and when the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S1709: No), the jackpot game control process Exit.

<Steps S1710 to S1712>
When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S1709: YES), the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to OFF (step S1710), ends the opening time measurement (step S1711), and sets the opening / closing execution mode flag. Set to ON (step S1712). Thereby, MPU41 can complete | finish opening and can make it transfer to opening / closing execution mode. Note that the opening / closing execution mode flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1713 described later, and the MPU 41 executes an opening / closing execution process (step S1714) described later when the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to ON.

<Step S1713>
In step S1713, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag set to ON in step S1712 is set to ON. When the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to on (step S1713: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1714, and when the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to off (step S1713: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S1715.

<Step S1714>
In step S1714, the MPU 41 executes an opening / closing execution mode control process. In the opening / closing execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game that opens the variable winning opening 316 a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. Details of the opening / closing execution mode control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1715>
In step S1715, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag set to ON in step S1809 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. 18 described later is set to ON. When the ending flag is set on (step S1715: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1716, and when the ending flag is set off (step S1715: No), the jackpot game control process Exit.

<Step S1716>
When the ending flag is set to ON (step S1715: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time starting at the later-described step S1717 is being measured when starting the ending. (Step S1716). If the MPU 41 is counting the ending time (step S1716: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1719. If the ending time is not being measured (step S1716: No), the process proceeds to step S1717.

<Steps S1717 and S1718>
In step S1717, the MPU 41 starts measuring the ending time after starting the ending, sets an ending start command in the RAM 412 (step S1718), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counted in step S1717 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the ending (big hit game) in step S1719 described later.

<Step S1719>
In step S1719, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time at which timing is started in step S1717 has reached a predetermined time required for executing the ending. When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S1719: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1720, and when the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S1719: No), the jackpot game control process Exit.

<Steps S1720 to S1722>
When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S1719: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag set to ON in step S1809 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. S1720), the ending time is finished (step S1721), and the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1722). Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. The jackpot end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12, and the MPU 41 determines the gaming state according to the jackpot type when the jackpot end flag is set to ON. Is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state (in this embodiment, from the short game state at the time of probability change or the short gaming state at the normal time).

<Step S1723>
In step S1723, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot end command in the RAM 412 and ends the jackpot game control process. The jackpot end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 (see steps S2715 and S2716 in FIG. 30 and steps S3215 to S3217 in FIG. 44).

[Open / close execution mode control processing]
Here, an example of the opening / closing execution mode control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1714 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. In the opening / closing execution mode control process, as described above, the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type.

<Step S1801>
In step S1801, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening opening flag set to ON in step S1804 of the opening / closing execution mode control process is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316 is open. When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1802 and when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S1801: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S1810.

<Step S1802>
In step S1802, the MPU 41 determines whether a condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is satisfied. Specifically, whether the MPU 41 has passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the variable winning opening 316 is opened, or has the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 316 exceeded a predetermined number (for example, nine)? Judge whether or not. When the conditions for closing the variable prize opening 316 are satisfied (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1803, and the conditions for closing the variable prize opening 316 are not satisfied. (Step S1802: No), the opening / closing execution mode control process ends.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is established (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 (step S1803), and further sets the variable winning opening release flag to OFF ( Step S1804).

<Steps S1805 and S1806>
In step S1805, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round game number R stored in the RAM 412, and then determines whether or not the round game number R after subtraction is “0” (step S1806). When the round game number R after subtraction is “0” (step S1805: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1808, and when the round game number R after subtraction is not “0” (step S1806: No). ), And the process proceeds to step S1807.

<Step S1807>
When the round game number R after the subtraction is not “0” (step S1806: No), the MPU 41 starts counting the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S1807), and the opening / closing execution mode control process Exit. The interval time at which the timing is started in step S1807 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1810, which will be described later, in order to determine whether or not to open the variable winning opening 316.

<Steps S1808 and S1809>
When the round game number R after subtraction is “0” (step S1805: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the open / close execution mode flag to off (step S1808), and further sets the ending flag to on (step S1809). Then, the opening / closing execution mode control process ends. This ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1715 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 16 in order to determine whether to start ending.

<Step S1810>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the interval time at which time measurement is started in step S1807 exceeds a predetermined time, ie, ends the interval. It is then determined whether or not to start a round game (step S1810). When the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1811, and when the interval time does not exceed the predetermined time (step S1810: No), the opening / closing execution mode control process Exit.

<Steps S1811 to S1813>
When the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 opens the variable winning opening 316 (step S1811) and turns on the variable winning opening release flag indicating whether the variable winning opening 316 is open. Setting is performed (step S1812). The variable winning opening opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1801 described above. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1813), and ends the opening / closing execution mode control process. This round game start command is for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of starting a round game (opening the variable prize opening 316) and what round game the round game is. This is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing at the time of start-up of the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of power failure, etc. Explanation of these processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of the voice lamp control device 5]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. For example, the MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

  As illustrated in FIG. 19, the MPU 51 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S1901), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1902), selection button operation detection processing (step S1903), and selection operation detection in the sub timer interrupt processing. Pattern determination processing (step S1904), determination button operation detection processing (step S1905), determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1906), counter update processing (step S1907), game setting processing (step S1908), command determination processing (step S1909), error processing (step S1910), variable game effect processing (step S1911), and jackpot game effect processing (step S1912) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1901) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, an operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, when the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S2001 to S2003 are executed, so that the operation state of the last three operations at the 1 msec interval as the operation history of the operation button 20 is the first detection flag to the third detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S1902) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining an operation state for the operation button 20 from an operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. If only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been completed. When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2102, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S2101: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2105.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the previous operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2103, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2102: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2108.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2104, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2103: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2110.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued when the operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. Then, the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued.

<Step S2105>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2101 that the first operation detection flag is off (step S2101: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S2105). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2105: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2106, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2105: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2110.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2107, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2106: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2110.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times (operation state). Therefore, the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2108>
When the MPU 51 determines in step S2102 that the second operation detection flag is off (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S2108). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2110, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2108: No), the process is performed. The process moves to step S2109.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times (operation state). Therefore, the third operation pattern flag is set on, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set off (see FIG. 22A). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation end of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times (See FIG. 22A). Note that the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection processing]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1903 in FIG. 19), the MPU 51 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the upper selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. In the upper selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “upper selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the lower selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 20, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the lower selection button operation process should just read "operation detection flag" as "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. In the left selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. In the right selection button operation process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S1904 in FIG. 19), the MPU 51 performs an upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process. Run.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 performs an upper operation from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An upper operation pattern flag for determining an operation state with respect to the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “upper selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “upper selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states for the upper selection button 211 three times. When it occurs, since it can be determined that the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continued, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set. Set to off. The first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the upper selection button 211 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Since it can be determined that (operation has started), the second upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the upper selection button 211 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Since it can be determined that (the operation has ended), the third upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 51 also displays the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, the “operation detection flag” is set to “lower selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “lower selection operation pattern”. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 three times. When it occurs, since it can be determined that the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continued, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag Set to off. The first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the lower selection button 212 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern “OFF”, “ON”, or “ON” is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Since it can be determined that (operation has started), the second lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

  Furthermore, the MPU 51 changes the lower selection button 212 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Since it can be determined that (the operation has ended), the third lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 detects the first to third lower selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 51 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “left selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “left selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22D, in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. When it occurs, since it can be determined that the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag Set to off. The first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the left selection button 213 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Since it can be determined that (the operation has started), the second left selection operation pattern flag is set on, and the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set off. The second left selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the left selection button 213 from the operation state to the non-operation state when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Since it can be determined that (the operation has ended), the third left selection operation pattern flag is set on, and the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set off. The third left selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 51 also displays the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when operation patterns other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, occur as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining an operation state for 214 is set. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, “operation detection flag” is set to “right selection operation detection flag” and “operation pattern flag” is set to “right selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. It may be read as “flag”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22E, in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 has the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the right selection button 214 three times. When it occurs, since it can be determined that the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set. Set to off. The first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the right selection button 214 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Since it can be determined that (operation has started), the second right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the right selection button 214 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Since it can be determined that (the operation has ended), the third right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). Used.

  The MPU 51 also displays the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Set all of to off. The MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Determination button operation detection processing]
In the determination button operation detection process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the determination button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 20, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the determination button operation detection process, the “operation detection flag” may be read as the “decision button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Determination operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state for the determination button 21B from the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining whether or not Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 21, detailed description thereof is omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, “operation detection flag” may be read as “determination operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 generates the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states for the three times of the determination button 21B. In this case, since it can be determined that the operation state of the determination button 21B is continued, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the determination button 21B from the non-operation state to the operation state when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” is generated as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times (operation state) Therefore, the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). .

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the determination button 21B from the operation state to the non-operation state when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” is generated as the operation state for the three times of the determination button 21B. Therefore, the third determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first determination operation pattern flag and the second determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has ended). .

  Further, the MPU 51 sets all the first to third determination operation pattern flags when operation patterns other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc., occur as the operation state of the determination button 21B three times. Set to off. The MPU 51 determines that the determination button 21B is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags are off.

[Counter update processing]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 19, in the counter update process (step S1907), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter, the variation display counter, and the scenario type counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variation display counter is for measuring the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is being performed, that the fluctuation display on the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like. In the present embodiment, for example, the fluctuation display counter indicates whether or not fluctuation display of the main symbol is started in the symbol display unit 341 in step S2301 in FIG. 26, step S2401 in FIG. 27, step S2501 in FIG. 28, and step S2601 in FIG. It is referred to when judging. The MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the scenario type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The scenario type counter updated here is used to determine the effect scenario type of the opening / closing execution mode effect in the jackpot game effect (see step S2805 in FIG. 33). For example, the scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 199.

[Game setting process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1908 in FIG. 19). In the game setting process, in the period when the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect are not executed, the jackpot is determined according to the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B). Game settings are made for game effects and variable game effects. In the present embodiment, a character setting for selecting a character in a variable game effect from a plurality of characters (selecting subjects) will be described as a game setting. Hereinafter, the character selected by the character setting is referred to as “selected character” (specific selection subject). The selected character image (selected subject image) 714 for this selected character is, for example, a variable game effect and a variable stop state (a variable stop screen described later) except when a specific effect including a super reach effect and a special reach effect is executed. 72 (see FIG. 25 (A))), it is displayed in a partial area of the symbol display portion 341 (for example, the lower right corner, the lower left corner, the lower portion, etc.). In addition, the selected character image 714 is displayed with priority over other characters in a predetermined effect (for example, cut-in effect, step-up effect, mini character effect), or the lottery result in the jackpot lottery over other characters. It may be displayed as an effect that has a high expectation of being a big hit.

  Before explaining the game setting process shown in FIG. 23, a transition example of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. Further, in the following description, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, even when a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the main symbol 715, the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) described later, the demo screen, and the power saving screen are not transferred. In the following description, it is assumed that a change stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A), which will be described later, is maintained, and that a game setting can be made after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change stop screen 71 is reached. Of course, the game setting may be made possible immediately after the change stop screen 71 is reached, and when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop screen 71 is reached, the game setting is automatically made regardless of the player's operation. The display screen may be shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B).

  As shown in FIG. 24, the display screen shifts to at least a change stop screen 71, a top menu screen 72, a game setting screen 73, and a character selection screen 74 in accordance with an operation on the selection determination unit 21 by the player, and the first operation The display shifts to a variation display screen 75 in which the main symbol 715 is variably displayed by winning a game ball in the mouth 314 or the second operation port 315.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (A), the change stop screen 71 shows that when the change display of the main symbol 715 is stopped, the hold number N and the hold number M are “0” and the jackpot gaming state. It is a screen in which the state in which the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 is stopped when not shifted is maintained. In the present embodiment, the selected character image 714 is displayed at the lower right corner of the change stop screen 71 on the change stop screen 71. The change stop screen 71 also shifts when “end” is selected by the player on the top menu screen 72, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25B, the top menu screen 72 is a screen that shifts from any of the change stop screen 71, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74. Specifically, the top menu screen 72 is “returned one” by the player on the game setting screen 73 when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after a predetermined time elapses after the change stop screen 71 is displayed, for example. Is selected, and when “return to top menu” is selected by the player on the character selection screen 74, the process proceeds. Note that the display screen may shift from the change stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72 when an operation unit other than the operation buttons 20 such as the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 is operated.

  Here, as illustrated in FIG. 25B, the top menu screen 72 includes a plurality of selection images 721 to 725, a cursor image 726, and a selection determination unit image 727.

  The plurality of selection images 721 to 725 are images for indicating a plurality of selectable items and for allowing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. In addition, the plurality of selection images 721 to 725 are also images for selecting a display screen as a transfer destination. The plurality of selection images 721 to 725 include a selection image 723 of “game setting customization”, a selection image 725 of “end”, and the like. A selection image 723 of “game setting customization” is used to shift from the top menu screen 72 to a game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) for performing game settings in a variable game and a jackpot game (see FIG. 25C). 24). The “end” selection image 725 is used to shift the display screen from the top menu screen 72 to the change stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) (see FIG. 24).

  The cursor image 726 is an image indicating the temporarily selected item. In addition, in order to emphasize that the selection image temporarily selected (the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” in FIG. 25B) is temporarily selected, other selection images 721, 722, 724 725 is displayed in a distinguishable manner.

  The selection determination unit image 727 is an image simulating the selection determination unit 21 (see FIG. 1), and is an image indicating that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by an operation on the selection determination unit 21. In the selection determination part image 727, the image corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 is marked with “select”, and the image corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 is emphasized. Is displayed. Further, the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection determination part image 727, the character “decision” is attached to the image corresponding to the determination button 21B, which indicates that the determination button 21B should be operated when selecting the temporarily selected item. The display example of the selection determination unit image 727 is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25C, the game setting screen 73 is a screen that shifts from the top menu screen 72 or the character selection screen 74. Specifically, the game setting screen 73 shifts when “game setting customization” is selected by the player on the top menu screen 72 and when “return one” is selected by the player on the character selection screen 74. To do.

  Here, as illustrated in FIG. 25C, the game setting screen 73 includes a plurality of selection images 731 to 735, a cursor image 726, and a selection determination unit image 727. Note that the cursor image 726 and the selection determination unit image 727 are the same as those in the top menu screen 72, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the following, in the case where the cursor image 726 and the selection determination unit image 727 are the same as those of the top menu screen 72, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted. The plurality of selection images 731 to 735 are images for indicating a plurality of selectable items (transfer destination display screen) and for allowing the player to select a desired item from among the plurality of items. The plurality of selection images 731 to 735 include a “character selection” selection image 733, a “return to one” selection image 734, and an “end” selection image 735.

  The selection image 733 of “character selection” is a character selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25 (D) for selecting a selection character image 714 (see FIG. 25 (A)) in the variable game effect from the game setting screen 73 as the display screen. ))) (See FIG. 24). The selection image 734 of “return to one” is for shifting the display screen from the game setting screen 73 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) (see FIG. 24). The “end” selection image 735 is used to shift the display screen from the game setting screen 73 to the change stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) (see FIG. 24).

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (D), the character selection screen 74 is a screen that shifts from the game setting screen 73. Specifically, the game setting screen 73 is shifted to the case where “character selection” is selected by the player on the game setting screen 73.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 25D, the character selection screen 74 includes a plurality of selection images 741 to 748, a provisional selection frame image 749, and a selection determination unit image 727. The plurality of selection images 741 to 748 include a plurality of character selection images 741 to 745, a “return to one” selection image 746, a “return to top menu” selection image 747, and a “end” selection image 748.

  The plurality of character selection images 741 to 745 are images that allow a player to select a selection character to be displayed as a selection character image 714 (see FIG. 25A). In this embodiment, 20 characters (character 1 to character 20) are prepared for the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect, and 9 characters (character 1 to character 9) of them are selected by the player. Can be displayed as a selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25A). Of course, you may enable it to select the selection character displayed as the selection character image 714 (refer FIG. 25 (A)) from all the characters prepared for the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect.

  In addition, on the character selection screen 74, five of the nine selectable characters are displayed simultaneously, the character arranged at the center is the largest, and the character is displayed smaller as the distance from the center increases. . These five characters are changed by scrolling the character 1 to the character 9 left and right by an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214. Of course, the number of characters simultaneously displayed on the character selection screen 74 is not limited to five, and may be any number of one or more, and all selectable characters may be displayed simultaneously. Further, when a plurality of characters are simultaneously displayed on the character selection screen 74, all the characters may be displayed with the same size.

  The temporary selection frame image 749 is an image indicating that the character can be selected by an operation on the determination button 21B, and is displayed so as to surround the character selection image. In FIG. 25D, the character 1 displayed in the center is a temporarily selected character. Note that the display position of the temporarily selected frame image 749 is fixed, and the position is not changed by an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214. In the case where a plurality of characters are simultaneously displayed in the same size on the character selection screen 74, the temporarily selected frame image 749 may be moved by an operation on the selection button 213, the right selection button 214, or the like.

  The selection image 746 of “return to one” is for shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) (see FIG. 24). The selection image 747 of “return to the top menu” is used to shift the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) (see FIG. 24). The “end” selection image 748 is used to shift the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the change stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) (see FIG. 24).

<Step S2201>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2201 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the variable display counter updated in the counter update process of step S1907 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 19 is 0, and will be described later with reference to FIG. Change stop screen display set to ON in step S2407 in the top menu screen process, step S2511 in the game setting screen process in FIG. 28 described later, or step S2612 in the character selection screen process in FIG. 29 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 based on whether or not the flag is on.

  When the display screen is the variation stop screen 71 (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2202, and when the display screen is not the variation stop screen 92 (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2203. To do.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 executes a game start standby process and ends the game setting process. Details of the game start standby process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B). Specifically, the MPU 51 performs step S2304 of a game start standby process in FIG. 26 described later, step S2509 of a game setting screen process in FIG. 28 described later, or step S2611 of a character selection screen process in FIG. 29 described later. Whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 72 is determined based on whether or not the top menu screen display flag set to ON in the transition process is ON. If the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2204. If the display screen is not the top menu screen 72 (step S2203: No), the processing proceeds to step S2205.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 executes the top menu screen process and ends the game setting process. The top menu screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is a game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 25C). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a game setting screen display flag set to ON in step S2409 of the top menu screen process of FIG. 27 described later or the game setting screen transition process of step S2609 of the character selection screen process of FIG. 29 described later. Whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 73 is determined based on whether or not is on. When the display screen is the game setting screen 73 (step S2205: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2206. When the display screen is not the game setting screen 73 (step S2205: No), the process proceeds to step S2207. To do.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen process and ends the game setting process. Details of the game setting screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the character selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25D). Specifically, the MPU 51 displays the display screen based on whether or not the character selection screen display flag set to ON in the character selection screen transition processing in step S2507 of the game setting processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the character selection screen 74 is displayed. When the display screen is the character selection screen 74 (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2208. When the display screen is not the character selection screen 74 (step S2207: No), the processing proceeds to step S2209. To do.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 executes the character selection screen process and ends the game setting process. Details of the character selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, when the display screen is not any of the change stop screen 71, the top menu screen 72, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74, the MPU 51 executes another process corresponding to the current display screen, and The setting process ends.

[Game start standby processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start standby process executed in step S2202 of the game setting process of FIG. In the game start standby process, a process of shifting the display screen from the change stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation button 20 is performed. Executed.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 715 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol has started to change based on whether or not the counter value of the change display counter is zero. The MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has started when the value of the variation display counter is not zero.

  When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has been started (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game start standby process and determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has not been started (step S2301: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated by the player based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22A). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S2302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2303, and when it is determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S2302: No), the game starts. The standby process is terminated.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 71. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed (when the counter value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the time counter, and stops changing by referring to the counter value of the time counter. The time after the screen 71 is displayed can be grasped.

  When the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S2303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2304. When the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S2303: No), the game start standby process is performed. Exit.

<Step S2304>
In step S2304, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined time since the transition to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (Yes in steps S2302 and S2303), and accordingly, according to the player's operation on the operation button 20 Thus, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Top menu screen processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process executed in step S2204 of the game setting process in FIG. In the top menu screen processing, a screen corresponding to an item selected by an operation on the selection determination unit 21 by the player from a plurality of selection images 721 to 725 displayed on the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B), for example, a game Processing for shifting the display screen to the setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) is executed.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 715 is started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2402, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2401: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2403.

<Step S2402>
When the change of the main symbol 715 is started (step S2401: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to OFF (step S2402), and the top menu screen processing is ended.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 selects the upper side based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2404. When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2403: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S2405.

<Step S2404>
When it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2403: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a temporary selection display change process for changing the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) (step S2404). ). For example, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 726 one higher than the selection image 723 when the upper selection button 211 is operated in a state where the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” shown in FIG. The selected image 722 is moved to the side. At this time, the selection image 723 is changed from the temporary selection display indicating that the selection is temporarily selected to the normal display, while the selection image 722 is changed from the normal display to the temporary selection display. On the other hand, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 726 to the side of the selection image 724 that is one level lower than the selection image 723 when the lower selection button 212 is operated while the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” is temporarily selected. The selected image 723 is changed from the temporary selection display to the normal display while the selection image 724 is changed from the normal display to the temporary selection display. When the process of step S2404 ends, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen process.

  Note that the MPU 51 temporarily selects the cursor image 726 and the selection images 721 to 725 even if the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated when the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B). Processing such as moving the display is not performed.

<Step S2405>
In step S2405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the determination button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22F).

  When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S2405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2406, and when it is determined that the operation on the selection button 21A has not been performed (step S2405: No). The top menu screen processing is terminated.

<Step S2406>
In step S2406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “end” selection image 725 (see FIG. 25B) on the top menu screen 72 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “end”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selection image 725 has been selected (step S2406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2407, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selection image 725 has not been selected (step S2406). S2406: No), the process proceeds to step S2408.

<Step S2407>
When it is determined that the “end” selection image 725 has been selected (step S2406: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A). ) Is executed (step S2407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF, while setting the fluctuation stop screen display flag to ON, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2408>
In step S2408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “game setting customization” selection image 723 (see FIG. 25B) on the top menu screen 72 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “game setting customization”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” has been selected (step S2408: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2409 and determines that the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” has not been selected. If so (step S2408: NO), the process proceeds to step S2410.

<Step S2409>
When it is determined that the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” has been selected (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) to the game setting screen 73 (FIG. 25C). The game setting screen transition process to be shifted to (see)) is executed (step S2409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to ON while setting the top menu screen display flag to OFF, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, if the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than “end” and “game setting customization”, the MPU 51 shifts to a display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player. . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to OFF.

[Game setting screen processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process executed in step S2206 of the game setting process in FIG. In the game setting screen process, as shown in FIG. 24, the character selection screen 74 (FIG. 25 (D)) is changed from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25 (C)) in response to the player's operation on the selection determination unit 21. (See FIG. 25B) and the top menu screen 72 are executed.

<Step S2501>
In step S2501 of FIG. 28, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the main symbol 715 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 is started (step S2501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2502, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 is not started (step S2501: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2503.

<Step S2502>
When the variation of the main symbol 715 is started (step S2501: Yes), the game setting screen display flag is set to OFF (step S2502), and the game setting screen processing is ended.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 selects the upper side based on the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22B) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22C). It is determined whether or not the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2503: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2504. If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2503: No), the processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S2505.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, as in the temporary selection display change process in step S2404 in the top menu screen process in FIG. Accordingly, a temporary selection display change process for moving the cursor image 726 and the temporary selection display up or down on the game setting screen 94 is executed. When the process of step S2504 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S2505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2506, and when the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S2505: No). The game setting screen process is terminated.

<Step S2506>
In step S2506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “character selection” selection image 733 (see FIG. 25C) on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “character selection”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “character selection” selection image 733 has been selected (step S2506: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2507, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “character selection” selection image 733 has not been selected. (Step S2506: No), the process proceeds to step S2508.

<Step S2507>
When it is determined that the selection image 733 of “character selection” has been selected (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) to the character selection screen 74 (FIG. 25D). )) Is executed (step S2507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the setting item selection screen display flag to ON while setting the game setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “return to one” selection image 734 on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to one”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “return to one” selection image 734 has been selected (step S2508: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2509, and the “return to one” selection image 734 has not been selected. (Step S2508: No), the process proceeds to step S2510.

<Step S2509>
When it is determined that the selection image 734 “return to one” has been selected (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) to the top menu screen 72 (FIG. 25 (FIG. 25). The top menu screen transition process to be shifted to (B) is executed (step S2509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the game setting screen display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting screen process.

<Step S2510>
In step S2510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “end” selection image 735 on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “end”. When the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selection image 735 has been selected (step S2510: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2511, and when the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selection image 735 has not been selected (step S2510). S2510: No), the process proceeds to step S2512.

<Step S2511>
When it is determined that the “end” selection image 735 has been selected (step S2510: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) to the change stop screen 71 (FIG. 25A). The change stop screen shift processing to be shifted to (see) is executed (step S2511). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, while setting the variable stop screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S2512>
In step S2512, the MPU 51 corresponds to the item selected by the player when the item selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B is other than “character selection”, “return one”, and “end”. Move to the display screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF.

[Character selection processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the character selection process executed in step S2208 of the game setting process in FIG. In the character selection process, a process of determining a selected character (selected character to be displayed as a selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25A)) selected by a player's operation on the selection determination unit 21 from a plurality of characters is executed. Then, in accordance with the item selected by the player, a process of shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the change stop screen 71 or the top menu screen 72 is executed.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the variation of the main symbol 715 is started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the counter value of the variation display counter is zero. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has been started (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and when the MPU 51 determines that the variation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2601: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2603.

<Step S2602>
When the change of the main symbol 715 is started (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to OFF (step S2602), and ends the character selection screen process.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operation patterns. Based on the flag (see FIGS. 22B to 22E), it is determined whether or not the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. .

  When the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2604, and when it is determined that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2603: No) The process proceeds to step S2605.

<Step S2604>
If it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the operated selection button 21A is the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214. The temporary selection display changing process for moving the temporary selection display is executed according to which one is selected (step S2604). For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated in a state where the character selection image 741 is provisionally selected, the selection image 748 of “END” is changed to provisional selection display. When the lower selection button 212 is operated, the selection image 746 of “return one” is changed to a temporary selection display. When the left selection button 213 is operated, the character selection images 741 to 745 are scrolled to the right one by one as a whole, and the selection image 743 of the character 9 is moved to the center to change the temporary selection display. On the contrary, when the right selection button 214 is operated, the character selection images 741 to 745 are scrolled to the left one by one and the character 2 selection image 742 is moved to the center to change the temporary selection display. To do. When the process of step S2604 ends, the MPU 51 ends the character selection screen process.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22F). When the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S2605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2606, and when it is determined that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S2605: No). The character selection screen process is terminated.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the character selection image 741 is selected by an operation on the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the character selection image 741 has been temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated. When the MPU 51 determines that the character selection image 741 is selected (step S2606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2607. When the MPU 51 determines that the character selection image 741 is not selected (step S2606: No), the processing is performed. Goes to step S2608.

<Step S2607>
If it is determined that the character selection image 741 has been selected (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 selects a character corresponding to the character selection image 741 that was temporarily selected when the enter button 21B was operated, as shown in FIG. The character determination process determined as the selected character to be displayed is executed (step S2607), and the character selection screen process is terminated.

  Specifically, the MPU 51 updates information on the selected character stored in the RAM 512. For example, when it is stored in the RAM 512 that the selected character is the character 2, if the character 1 is determined as the selected character in the step S2607, information indicating that the selected character is the character 1 is stored in the RAM 512. Rewrite the contents.

  In the embodiment, even when the character determination process is performed, the display screen is not transferred from the character selection screen 74 to another screen such as the top menu screen 72. However, when the character determination process is performed, the display screen is displayed as a character. You may make it transfer to other screens, such as the top menu screen 72, from the selection screen 74. FIG.

<Step S2608>
In step S2608, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 746 “return to one” has been selected by an operation on the decision button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return one”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 746 of “return to one” is selected (step S2608: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2609 and determines that the selection image 746 of “return to one” is not selected. If so (step S2608: No), the process proceeds to step S2610.

<Step S2609>
When it is determined that the selection image 746 of “return to one” is selected (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the game setting screen 73 ( Step S2609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game selection screen display flag to ON while setting the character selection screen display flag to OFF, and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 747 “return to top menu” has been selected by the player's operation on the decision button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item temporarily selected when the determination button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 747 “return to the top menu” has been selected (step S2610: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2611, and determines that the selection image 747 “return to the top menu” has not been selected. If so (step S2610: No), the process proceeds to step S2612.

<Step S2611>
If it is determined that the selection image 747 “return to top menu” has been selected (step S2610: YES), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen transition process for transitioning the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the top menu screen 72 (step S2611). ). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON while setting the character selection screen display flag to OFF, and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2612>
When the MPU 51 does not select the character selection image and the selected item is other than “return to one” and “return to the top menu” by the player's operation on the decision button 21B, “end” is selected. Since the determination can be made, a change stop screen transition process for transferring the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the change stop screen 71 is executed (step S2612), and the character selection screen process ends. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to OFF and sets the fluctuation stop screen display flag to ON.

[Command judgment processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S1909 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the command determination process, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2701>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2701: YES), the process proceeds to step S2702. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2701: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. It should be noted that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2701, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it becomes a processing target. For example, the command is stored in the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2702: YES), the process proceeds to step S2703. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2702: NO), the process proceeds to step S2706.

<Step S2703>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 31A), a variation type table (see FIG. 31B), and an effect type table (preliminarily stored in the ROM 511). The variation pattern is determined based on the counter value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 and the counter value (see FIGS. 32A to 32C). In addition, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type Is 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a main symbol that is first stopped on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed last. It is a design. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 32A), a super reach effect table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 32B), and a special reach effect table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 32B). 32C) is included.

  FIG. 31A shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 31 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is determined. In FIG. 31A, the main symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a probability combination big hit (either 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit), “777” ”Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that it is a symbol combination other than“ 333 ”and“ 777 ”that indicates that either the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected. It is assumed.

  If the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 is “5R normal jackpot”, there is no distribution of “3” and “7” as the first stop symbol, and the main symbols other than “3” and “7” The first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the symbol combination “333” or “777” indicating 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, there is no distribution of “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination “777” indicating that it is 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combination indicating 5R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combinations whose main symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal jackpots can be stopped and displayed. If the main result other than “3” except “7” is determined as the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag on. . The first promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the probability variation promotion effect that clearly indicates that the 5R probability variation is a big hit in a state where it is suggested that the 5R is a normal jackpot (visibility inhibition in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in the effect determination process).

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, symbol combinations other than “777” that indicate 16R probability variation big hit can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination other than “777” symbol combination indicating that the main symbol stop display result indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is stopped. Can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit” and “3” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to ON and “3” as the first stop symbol. When the main symbol other than “7” is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in a state where it is suggested that the 5R probability variation jackpot is present (the visual hindrance in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in the effect determination process). The third promotion effect flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a probability change promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability change jackpot in a state in which it is suggested that 5R is a normal jackpot (visibility inhibition in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in the effect determination process).

  Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol determined previously. Thereby, the stop symbol combination displayed on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 in the variable game is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. Is done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “out”, the out type selected based on the out type table (see FIG. 8D) and the first determined first. A second stop symbol is determined based on the stop symbol. For example, when the detachment type is front / rear detachment reach, the second stop symbol is determined as the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined as the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than front / rear detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is determined by the design. When the detachment type is complete detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 31B is a diagram showing an example of the variation type table. As shown in FIG. 31 (B), the variation type table defines the variation display time and the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command. For example, the variation display command “A01” having the lottery result “normal jackpot” and the variation pattern “01” is associated with the variation display time “30 s” and the variation type “normal reach”. In addition, the variation display command “B02” having the lottery result of “5R probability variation big hit” and the variation pattern “02” is associated with the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach”. The variation display command “C03” with the result “16R probability variation big hit” and the variation pattern “03” is associated with the variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach”. Further, the fluctuation pattern command “D04” with the lottery result “disappear” and the fluctuation pattern “04” is associated with the fluctuation display time “7 s” and the fluctuation type “no reach”, and the lottery result is The variation pattern command “D05” having “out” and the variation pattern “05” is associated with the variation display time “10 s” and the variation type “no reach”.

  Further, FIGS. 32A to 32C are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect type table. The production type table is defined for each variation type. FIG. 32A is a normal reach production table when the variation type is normal reach, FIG. 32B is a super reach production table when the variation type is super reach, and FIG. It is a special reach production table in case a change classification is special reach. In this embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example. However, the number of types of effects may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 32, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach production table shown in FIG. 32A, “Production X1” is provided as the production type corresponding to the counter value of the production type counter according to the lottery results (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and off). ~ "Direction X5" is defined. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is normal reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Also, in the super reach production table shown in FIG. 32B, “production Y1” to “production Y5” are defined as production types corresponding to the counter value of the production type counter according to the lottery result. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the super reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Furthermore, in the special reach production table shown in FIG. 32C, “production Z1” to “production Z5” are defined as production types corresponding to the counter value of the production type counter according to the lottery result. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is special reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the special reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets a display variation pattern command indicating the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table, and the effect type counter, the variation type, and the effect type in the RAM 512. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2705 to be described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes symbol variation display and effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. It should be noted that the display variation pattern command may include information on whether or not the jackpot is won.

<Step S2704>
Returning to the description of FIG. 30, in step S2704, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update processing of step S1907 in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 19, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed based on the variation display counter. It is possible to determine the remaining time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the count value of the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2705>
In step S2705, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 to the display control device 6, and ends the command determination process. Let The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the main symbol stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type determined in step S2703. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a main symbol variation image and effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of main symbols (three in this embodiment) until the preset variable display time elapses. Then, changes in a plurality of main symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed. Then, when all the main symbols are stopped and displayed and the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed, the symbol variation display of the next variable game or processing corresponding to the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the variation display of the main symbol, an effect corresponding to the content of the variation type and the effect type specified by the display variation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2706>
In step S2706, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is started, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2706: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2707, and when the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2706: No), processing is performed. Goes to step S2709.

<Step S2707>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2706: YES), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect determination process (step S2707). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2708>
In step S2708, when the jackpot game effect determination process ends, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in step S3202 of the jackpot game effect process in FIG. 44 described later.

<Step S2709>
In step S2709, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of starting a round game and the round game of the round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. Is set in step S1813 of the open / close execution mode control process. Here, when the received command is a round game start command (step S2709: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2710. When the received command is not a round game start command (step S2709: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2711.

<Step S2710>
In step S2710, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON. At this time, the MPU 51 specifies the number of rounds of the round game to be started from the information regarding the number of rounds of the round game included in the round game start command, stores the number of rounds in the RAM 512, and ends the command determination process. To do. The round game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the round game effect process in step S3209 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44 described later. Further, the number of round games stored in the RAM 512 in step S2710 is referred to when it is determined in step S3016 in the error processing of FIG. 42 described later whether an unrounded round game exists.

<Step S2711>
In step S2711, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variable winning award winning command. The variable winning award winning command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that a game ball has won a prize at the variable winning opening 316. When a gaming ball wins at the variable winning opening 316, a winning ball command setting process ( It is set in step S1303) of FIG. Here, when the received command is a variable winning award winning command (step S2711: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2712, and when the received command is not a variable winning award winning command (step S2711: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2713.

<Step S2712>
In step S2712, the MPU 51 performs a payout counting process. In this payout counting process, the cumulative number of payouts for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot series is counted and stored. Specifically, the MPU 51 counts a value obtained by adding the number of winning balls (for example, 13) for winning a prize to the variable winning slot 316 every time a variable winning slot winning command is received, and stores it in the RAM 512 as a cumulative number of balls to be stored. Remember. Note that the accumulated number of balls that have been stored in the RAM 512 is cleared after the jackpot series is completed. Further, the payout counting process may be a process of counting the cumulative value of the number of winning game balls to the variable winning opening 316 and directly storing it in the RAM 512 without directly counting the accumulated number of balls. Further, the number-of-balls counting process may be a process of counting a so-called difference ball number obtained by subtracting the number of game balls (number of out balls) at the time of jackpot game from the cumulative number of balls at the time of jackpot. The number of difference balls may be not only the number of game balls launched at the time of the jackpot game, but also a game ball obtained by further differentiating the number of game balls launched in the probability variation time-saving mode that shifts after the jackpot game. In addition, the payout counting process counts not only the cumulative number of balls for the number of winning balls of the variable winning port 316 but also the cumulative number of balls for which the number of winning balls from other winning ports such as the general winning port 313 is added. It may be a process.

  Here, during the jackpot reaming game, for example, in the normal non-short-time gaming state (the state that is in the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game becomes a big hit, so-called gaming state from the first hit This includes all jackpots until the player falls into the non-short-time gaming state, and the first jackpot is also included in the jackpot Renso. The jackpot renso can also be defined as all jackpots until the gaming state falls to the normal time short gaming state.

  In the payout counting process of step S2712, the cumulative number of balls may be counted as a sum of the payouts for winning in the general winning opening 313, the first operating port 314, and the second operating port 315. In this case, as for the cumulative number of balls to be played, only the balls in the jackpot game may be counted, or in addition to the jackpot game, the balls in the probability variation game state and the normal time short game state may be counted.

<Step S2713>
In step S2713, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending starts, that is, the opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the ending is started, in step S1718 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. Is set. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2713: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2714. If the received command is not an ending start command (step S2713: NO), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process proceeds to S2715.

<Step S2714>
In step S2714, the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The ending start flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the ending effect start process in step S3212 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44 described later.

<Step S2715>
In step S2715, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2715: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2716. If the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2715: No), the process is performed. Goes to step S2717.

<Step S2716>
In step S2716, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in step S3315 of the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44 described later.

<Step S2717>
In step S2717, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a pending command. The hold command includes the first hold command and the second hold command as described above. The first hold command includes information for specifying the number N of the variable display generated by winning or winning the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the first operation port 314. The second hold command includes information for specifying the number of hold of the change display generated by winning type to or from the jackpot, the change pattern, and the winning to the second operation port 315. Here, when the received command is a pending command (step S2717: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2718, and when the received command is not a pending command (step S2717: No), the process proceeds to step S2719. Transition.

<Step S2718>
In step S2718, if the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type specified by the first hold command or the failure type, the fluctuation pattern, the number of holds N, and the like in the fluctuation type area of the RAM 512. . Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type specified by the second hold command, or a failure type, a change pattern, the number of holds M, and the like in the change type area of the RAM 512. After executing step S2718, the MPU 51 ends the command determination process.

<Step S2719>
In step S2719, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an error occurrence command. The error occurrence command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that an error has occurred. When an error has occurred, the error determination process shown in FIG. 9 (step S1007) is performed as an error occurrence command corresponding to the type of error. ). Here, when the received command is an error occurrence command (step S2719: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2720, and when the received command is not an error occurrence command (step S2719: No), the process is stepped. The process proceeds to S2721.

<Step S2720>
In step S2720, the MPU 51 sets the error occurrence flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The error occurrence flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to perform error display in step S3001 in the error processing of FIG.

<Step S2721>
In step S2721, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an error resolution command. The error elimination command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the error has been eliminated. When the error is eliminated, the error determination process in FIG. 9 (step S1007) is performed as an error elimination command according to the type of error. ). Here, if the received command is an error resolution command (step S2721: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2722, and if the received command is not an error resolution command (step S2721: No), the process proceeds to step S2722. The process moves to S2723.

<Step S2722>
In step S2722, the MPU 51 sets the error elimination flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The error elimination flag is referred to when determining whether or not to cancel the error display in step S3007 in the error processing of FIG.

<Step S2723>
In step S <b> 2723, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Big hit game production decision processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed in step S2707 of the command determination process of FIG. In the jackpot game effect determination process, effects to be executed in the jackpot game such as an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect to be executed in the jackpot game are determined.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a so-called reserved resort is executed after the jackpot game is over. Reservation consecutive villas are jackpots (5R) as success / failure information in any of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB when the jackpot game is ended and the gaming state is shifted to the time saving mode. This is executed when information indicating that the probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) is included. In other words, the “holding villa” means that a jackpot game is generated in a variable game with the upper limit M being the number of holds at the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the number of holds M at the end of the jackpot game is 4, a case where a jackpot occurs in a variable game within four times after the shift to the short-time mode is referred to as a “holding villa”. Whether or not the hold consecutive resort is executed can be determined by referring to the variation type area of the RAM 512, for example, and whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second hold command is stored.

  However, in step S2801, the variation type area is referred to at the stage of starting the opening effect, and it is determined whether or not the reserved villa is executed. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect is a jackpot, it is not determined as a reserved consecutive resort in step S2801. In addition, for the start winning of the game ball to the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315 from the start of the jackpot game effect until the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect, for example, the reserved villa confirmation effect is executed at the ending In this case, whether or not the reserved villa is executed is determined by whether or not the reserved villa is executed in the ending effect start process of step S3214 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 44 described later. It is determined whether or not a confirmed effect is executed.

<Step S2802>
When the reserved consecutive resort is executed (step S2801: YES), the MPU 51 sets the reserved consecutive resort flag to ON (step S2802). The reserved consecutive resort flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the reserved consecutive resort determination effect as the visually impaired effect in step S2907 of the visually impaired effect determining process of FIG. 36 described later.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 executes a process of determining an opening effect to be executed in the opening from the transition to the jackpot game until the opening / closing execution mode is started. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed, for example, based on the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511. In addition, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined opening effect type to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, as an opening effect, the MPU 51 clearly indicates that when the symbol combination is “777”, it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and when the symbol combination is “333”, it indicates that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. When the suggestion effect and the symbol combination is a doublet other than “777” and “333”, an effect suggesting that 5R is a normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined not according to the jackpot type, but according to the symbol combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, in the opening effect, a specific image such as an image indicating the number of jackpots may be displayed. Here, the number of jackpot games is as described in step S2712 described above. For example, the number of jackpot games is the number of jackpots from the first hit until the gaming state falls into the normal non-short game state. On the other hand, examples of the specific image displayed in the opening effect include a character image including a selected character.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type and the selected character. The MPU 51 identifies the jackpot type based on the jackpot flag type (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) set to ON in step S2703 of the command determination process of FIG. On the other hand, the MPU 51 refers to the RMA 512 to specify which of the characters 1 to 9 is the selected character, for example.

<Steps S2805 and S2806>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table according to the jackpot type and the selected character specified in step S2804, and further determines the opening / closing execution mode effect based on the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table. It executes (step S2806).

  34 shows an example of the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, and FIG. 35 shows an example of the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table.

  The 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 34 is a table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of 5R big hit. That is, the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of 5R jackpot using the same 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table without distinguishing between the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot. Of course, different 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination tables may be prepared for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect may be determined based on these tables.

  This 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character. In this embodiment, since any one of the characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes nine effect scenario tables corresponding to the characters 1 to 9, respectively. Including. In FIG. 34, each effect scenario table is expressed as “5R character N effect scenario table” (N is an integer of 1 to 9). Each effect scenario table includes an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter.

  The effect scenario type specifies a combination of round game effects executed in 1R to 5R round games. In the present embodiment, five effect scenarios are set for each of the selected characters, and a character effect (hereinafter referred to as “specific character effect”) using the selected character as a main character is executed for any scenario. Here, as a character effect in a round game, for example, reproduction of a character promotion video (PV), display of a character introduction video or still image, and the like can be considered.

  Note that the number of effect scenarios for the selected character is not limited to five, but may be other numbers, and it is not necessary to set the same number of scenarios for each selected character. In each scenario, character effects are executed in all round games, but character effects are executed in some round games, and round game effects other than character effects are executed in other round games. Good.

  The round game effect character type specifies a round game effect executed in each round game of 1R to 5R. In FIG. 34, a character effect mainly composed of a character N (N is an integer of 1 to 9) is represented as “character N” (N is an integer of 1 to 9). For any scenario, a specific character effect is defined, and it is determined that this specific character effect is executed in the same round (specific unit game) regardless of which scenario is selected. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the specific character effect is executed in 1R of each scenario. That is, in the 5R jackpot game, the specific character effect for the selected character is always executed in the 1R round game. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the round game in which the specific character effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the specific character effect for the selected character by paying attention to the variable winning opening 316, for example. The specific character effect does not necessarily have to be executed at 1R, and may be rounds after 2R.

  The scenario type counter is a counter for selecting an effect scenario, and an effect scenario is associated with each count value within a predetermined range of the scenario type counter. For example, in the 5R character 1 effect scenario table, the counter value of the scenario type counter “0-39” is “Character 1 scenario A”, the counter value “40-79” is “Character 1 scenario B”, The value “80 to 119” is “Character 1 Scenario C”, the counter value “120 to 159” is “Character 1 Scenario D”, and the counter value “160 to 199” is “Character 1 Scenario E”. It is associated. The scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 199, and is incremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S1907 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 19, and the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect. It is possible to determine the production scenario based on the count value of the scenario type counter acquired at times. For example, when the selected character is “Character 1” and the counter value of the scenario type counter is “88”, “Character 1 scenario C” is determined as the production scenario.

  The 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 35 is a table that is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of 16R big hit. This 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes an effect scenario table corresponding to a selected character including an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter, in the same manner as the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table. Since the effect scenario type, the round game effect character type, and the scenario type counter have already been described in the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, description thereof is omitted here. In the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, it is determined that the specific character effect is executed in the same round regardless of which scenario is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table has a larger number of scenarios in each scenario table than the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, and 12 scenarios are set. Of course, the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table may have the same number of scenarios as the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table or less than the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table. Good. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table is not limited to executing an effect with a different character type for each round game, but an effect with a different character type is executed at regular intervals (for example, the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316). You may do.

  Furthermore, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the present embodiment, the specific character effect for the selected character is determined fixed to one round of the round game (specific round), but if the game situation is advantageous for the player, For example, if a game is advantageous for such a player when the next consecutive jackpot is scheduled to be executed relatively, such as when the pending consecutive villa is confirmed, or when it is a probable jackpot In a jackpot game, the specific character effect may not be executed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to whether the specific character effect is executed in one round of the round game. If the specific character effect is not executed in the jackpot game because the game situation is advantageous to the player, the specific character effect may be performed a plurality of times in the next jackpot game. For example, the specific character effect may be executed in all the round games in the opening / closing execution mode, or the specific character effect may be performed in at least one of the opening and the ending in addition to all the round games in the opening / closing execution mode. You may make it perform. Thereby, when the specific character effect is not executed in the previous jackpot, the player can enjoy the specific character effect in the current jackpot game until the previous jackpot game. In addition, regarding the execution of the specific character effect in all round games in the open / close execution mode, it is a condition that the game situation is advantageous to the player as in the case of a probable big hit, as in the case where the reserved consecutive resort is confirmed Also good.

<Step S2807>
Returning to the description of FIG. 33, in step S2807, the MPU 51 executes a process of determining an ending effect to be executed in the ending from the end of the opening / closing execution mode to the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the ending effect according to the jackpot type based on the ending effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined ending effect type to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

  Here, the ending effect is to notify the player that the jackpot game is ended after the opening / closing execution mode is ended. In the ending effect, for example, information such as a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in a variable game that triggered the jackpot game (description of a game state to be transferred after the jackpot game ends) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. The Specifically, in the ending production, the lottery result is displayed in the normal short game state (the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode) or the normal non-short time game state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). When the so-called first hit is a 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, an image that clearly indicates a transition to the short probability gaming state in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. When the initial hit is a 5R normal big hit, an image that clearly indicates the transition to the normal non-short game state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates the transition to the promiscuous short game state is, for example, “OORUSH rush”. On the other hand, an image that clearly indicates the transition to the normal non-short-time gaming state is, for example, “chance zone entry”, and the number of time-savings is also displayed. In the ending effect when the lottery result is a big win in the short game state at the time of probability change, an image clearly indicating that the short game state at the time of probability change is again displayed on the symbol display unit 341. For example, an image that clearly indicates the transition to the promiscuous short game state is “continue XXRUSH”. In addition, the ending effect is an image showing the number of transitions to the short game state at the time of probability change (for example, the number of continuations of RUSH) with respect to the first hit of the first time, and the image of the character that appeared in the jackpot effect in the variable game leading to the jackpot game. It may be displayed on the display unit 341. In step S2807, an image indicating the number of times of transition to the probability-changing short gaming state and a character image are determined.

  Furthermore, in the ending effect, an image relating to the appearance of balls such as the number of balls played in the jackpot game and the total number of balls played in the retreat is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the ending effect may be a display of a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that a later-described reserved resort will be executed. These images are determined in the ending effect start process in step S3214 in the jackpot game effect process which will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2808>
In step S2808, the MPU 51 executes a visual hindrance effect determination process that impedes visual recognition of the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, and ends the jackpot game effect process. Details of the visual hindrance effect determination process will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  In the jackpot game effect determination process shown in FIG. 33, the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, the ending effect, and the visual hindrance effect are determined in this order, but the order of determining each effect is limited to the order shown in FIG. Not. For example, the ending effect may be determined prior to the opening / closing execution mode effect, or the visual hindrance effect may be determined prior to at least one of the opening / closing execution mode effect and the ending effect. Further, the opening / closing execution mode effect or the visual hindrance effect is not limited to when the jackpot game start command is received (at the start of the jackpot game), but may be determined at the start of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the visual inhibition effect is determined before the opening / closing execution mode effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect is determined such that the specific character effect for the selected character is executed in a round game in which the visual inhibition effect is not executed. This point will be described later as a ninth embodiment with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

[Visual obstruction effect determination processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the visual hindrance effect determination process executed in step S2808 of the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. In the visual hindrance effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the visual hindrance effect is executed. When the visual hindrance effect is executed, the timing for executing the visual hindrance effect is determined.

  Here, the visual hindrance effect is an effect that hinders the visual recognition of the image game effect executed in the symbol display unit 341, obstructs the visual recognition of a part of the game image effect, and allows a part of the game image effect to be visually recognized. This includes an effect in which the viewing of all or substantially all of the effects and the game image effects is obstructed, and the game image effects are completely or hardly visible. Further, the visual hindrance effect is not limited to an effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 such as a layer image effect in which an image is displayed on a layer visible on the display screen of the symbol display unit 341. Front display image effect executed in a translucent front display arranged so as to cover the symbol display unit 341 on the front surface, or a movable accessory member 39 moving to a position covering the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 Includes a bonus act. Furthermore, for example, the layer image effect is an execution of the game image effect in addition to the effect that the visual recognition of part or all of the game image is obstructed by displaying the layer image superimposed on the game image effect in the symbol display unit 341. And the effect that the layer image is displayed on the entire display screen of the symbol display unit 341 is included instead of the game image effect. In addition, the layer image displayed superimposed on the game image effect is not only a non-transparent layer image in which the lower layer image cannot be visually recognized, but also the lower layer image can be visually recognized. Includes a transparent layer image that allows you to see the layer image.

  In the following, before explaining the visual hindrance effect determination process shown in FIG. 36, the opening / closing execution mode effect and the visual hindrance effect will be described first with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37A is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect scenario determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 and a round game for executing a visual recognition inhibition effect. In FIG. 37A, the opening / closing execution mode effect is an example in which “Character 1 scenario A” is determined as the effect scenario in the 16R probability variation big hit game when the selected character is the character 1. The 16R jackpot “Character 1 Scenario A” opening / closing execution mode effect is performed in this order as a character effect mainly consisting of character 1, character 2, character 14, character 7. Is done. Here, the specific character effect for the selected character is executed in a fixed manner in one round (first unit game) as described later (see FIGS. 34 and 35). In the example of FIG. 37A, the selected character is the character 1, and the specific character effect for the character 1 is executed in one round.

  In the example of FIG. 37 (A), as the visual hindrance effect, a specific number of ball display effect is performed in 2 rounds, a reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect in 3 rounds, and a promotion effect in 4 rounds. Then, for the round in which the specific number of ball display effect is executed, the specific number of ball display flag stored in the RAM 512 is set to ON, and the specific number of ball display flag is set for the round in which the specific number of ball display effect is not executed. Is set to off. In the example of FIG. 37 (A), the specific number ball display flag is set on for two rounds where the specific number ball display effect is executed, and the specific number ball display flag is set off in the other rounds. (See steps S2915 and S2916 in FIG. 36).

  In the gaming machine 10, the specific character effect for the selected character is determined to be executed in one round as described above (see steps S2804 to S2806 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34 and FIG. 35). It is determined that each of the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect and the promotion effect, which are the visual hindrance effects, is executed after the second round (steps S2906 and S2911 in FIG. 36).

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect, ending effect and visual hindrance effect) determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. Executed.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, in a round game in a jackpot game, there is one that displays a still image such as a character introduction image in addition to a video such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in a production in a variable game. is there. Also, in jackpot games, the promotion effect that suggests or clearly indicates the promotion from a big jackpot to a promising jackpot, etc., and the reserved playhouse confirmation effect that clearly shows that the jackpot that will become a reserved consecutive resort after the jackpot game is won There are also gaming machines that do.

  However, the promotion effect and the reserved villa confirmation effect are generally executed while hindering the visual recognition of the effect on the character. For example, the movable accessory member operates so as to cover the symbol display part, and the overlay image for informing that the result of the promotion effect or the reserved villa is confirmed is displayed on the symbol display part. Visual recognition of the performance is hindered. Therefore, the visual recognition of the favorite character's performance may be hindered by the movable combination or the overlay image at the timing when the player's favorite character's performance is executed. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the performance of the favorite character.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the specific character effect for the selected character is executed at a timing different from the visual recognition effect that obstructs the visual recognition of the specific character effect. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the specific character effect is fixed to a specific round game among a plurality of round games and executed in a round game different from the specific round in each jackpot game. To do. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the visual hindrance effect that obstructs the visual recognition of the character effect such as the promotion effect or the reserved resort determination effect is one round (specific round) that is the execution round of the specific character effect for the selected character. It is executed after 2 rounds. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the selected character in the specific character effect in the jackpot game without obstructing the visual recognition of the specific character effect with respect to the selected character.

  FIG. 37B is a diagram showing an example of the round game effect screen 81. As shown in FIG. 37 (B), the round game effect screen 81 has a round number display image 811, a jackpot round number display image 812, and a character introduction image 813.

  The round number display image 811 is an image that displays the number of rounds being executed. In the round number display image 811 shown in FIG. 37B, it is shown that the currently executed round is four rounds.

  The jackpot round number display image 812 is an image suggesting the maximum number of round games executed in the jackpot game. In the jackpot round number display image 812 shown in FIG. 37 (B), it is suggested that the maximum round game number executed in the jackpot game is five rounds, that is, the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability jackpot. Yes.

  The character introduction image 813 is a still image displayed in the character effect, and displays the characteristics of the character displayed in the variable game effect. In the character introduction image 813 shown in FIG. 37B, the characteristics of the character 7 are displayed together with the image of the character 7. In FIG. 37 (B), an example in which the introduction image of the selected character is displayed as a still image as the specific character effect for the selected character has been described. It may be a combination of a moving image and a still image. In addition, the specific character effect is not limited to displaying an image to be an introduction image of the selected character, and is not particularly limited as long as the image is mainly a selected character in addition to a moving image such as a promotion video.

  FIGS. 38A to 38F are diagrams illustrating an example of a promotion effect executed as a visual recognition inhibition effect in a jackpot game effect. The promotion effects include the promotion success effects shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C) and the promotion failure effects shown in FIGS. 38 (A), 38 (E), and 38 (F). In the opening / closing execution mode effect shown in FIG. 37A, the promotion effect is executed in four rounds of the round game in the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (A), in the promotion effect, in both the promotion success effect and the promotion failure effect, first, a transition is made from the round game effect screen 81 (see FIG. 37 (B)) to the button operation request screen 82. The button operation request screen 82 is a screen in which an operation button image 821 imitating the operation button 20 is superimposed on the round game effect screen 81 as an overlay image, and is a screen that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. . In this button operation request screen 82, since the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect is inhibited by the operation button image 821, the effect of displaying the operation button image 821 corresponds to the visual inhibition effect of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, in the promotion success effect, the round game in which the operation button image 821 is released on condition that the operation button 20 is operated by the player while the operation button image 821 is displayed. While moving to the effect screen 81, a movable accessory act effect is executed in which the movable accessory member 39 moves from the standby position to the actuated position. In the state where the movable accessory member 39 has moved to the operating position, the round game effect screen 81 is covered by the movable accessory member 39, and the visual recognition of the round game effect screen 81 is hindered. That is, the movable accessory act effect in the promotion success effect is executed as an effect that obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. In the promotion effect, when the operation button 20 is not operated while the operation button image 821 is displayed, the movable accessory operation effect may be executed immediately after the display of the operation button image 821 is released, or revived. As an effect, a movable accessory activation effect may be executed immediately after the end of the round game or at an ending, or the promotion effect in the jackpot game may be postponed.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (C) and 38 (D), in the successful promotion effect, the movable accessory member 39 returns from the operating position to the standby position after the execution of the movable accessory operating effect, and the display screen is rounded. The game effect screen 81 shifts to the promotion success screen 83 and returns to the round game screen 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed. The promotion success effect screen 83 shown in FIG. 38C is a screen that clearly indicates that the promotion success effect has been executed, and includes a character image 831 that clearly indicates the promotion success “congratulations on promotion!”. The character image 831 is displayed as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81 so as to be superimposed on the entire round game effect screen 81 and completely obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 831 as the promotion success effect corresponds to the visual hindrance effect of the present invention.

  Also, in the round game effect screen 81 shown in FIG. 38 (D), since the round number display image suggests that the jackpot type is 5R, the jackpot round number display image that clearly indicates that the jackpot type is 16R. It is changed to 812. That is, in this embodiment, as the jackpot round number display image 812 of the round game effect screen 81, an image suggesting that the jackpot type is 5R is displayed before the promotion success effect is executed, and after the promotion success effect is executed. Displays an image clearly indicating that the jackpot type is 16R.

  In the present embodiment, it has been described that the promotion promotion effect clearly indicates promotion of 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability change jackpot to 16R jackpot, but the promotion effect clearly indicates promotion from 5R normal jackpot to 5R probability change jackpot. May be executed as Further, the promotion success effect may be executed as an effect of displaying a promotion confirmed image that clearly indicates the promotion success, for example, an image shown in FIG. On the contrary, the promotion success effect may be an effect of executing the movable accessory operation effect without displaying the promotion confirmation image that clearly indicates the promotion success. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the promotion confirmed image does not need to be displayed on the whole round game effect screen 81 as a non-transparent image in which no lower layer image can be confirmed. It may be displayed so as to cover the part, and in any case where a part or all of the round game effect screen 81 is covered, the lower layer image is displayed as a transparent image that can be confirmed thinly or vaguely. May be. Furthermore, even if the promotion effect is an effect in which the movable accessory operation effect is executed without shifting to the button operation request screen 82 that displays the operation button image 821 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. Good. In the promotion success effect, the movable accessory member 39 is configured to include a display such as a liquid crystal display device, and a promotion confirmation image that clearly indicates that the jackpot type is 16R is displayed on the display. Good.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 (E) and 38 (F), in the promotion failure effect, the display screen shifts from the round game effect screen 81 to the promotion failure effect screen 84, and a certain time (for example, 1 to 5 seconds) is obtained. After a lapse, the screen returns to the round game effect screen 81. The promotion failure effect screen 84 shown in FIG. 38 (E) is a screen that clearly indicates that the promotion failure effect has been executed, and includes a character image 841 that clearly indicates the promotion failure “Zanen”. This character image 841 is displayed as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81 so as to be superimposed on the entire round game effect screen 81 and obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 841 corresponds to the visual hindrance effect of the present invention.

  The promotion failure effect may be executed as an effect in which the movable accessory member 39 does not operate without displaying the character image 841 clearly indicating the promotion failure. Further, the promotion confirmed image can be changed in the same manner as the promotion confirmed image. That is, the promotion confirmed image does not need to be displayed as a non-transparent image in which the lower layer image cannot be confirmed at all on the entire round game effect screen 81 as shown in FIG. It may be displayed so as to cover the part, and in any case where a part or all of the round game effect screen 81 is covered, the lower layer image is displayed as a transparent image that can be confirmed thinly or vaguely. May be.

  Also, in the round game effect screen 81 shown in FIG. 38 (F), a jackpot round number display image 812 that clearly indicates that the jackpot type is 5R is displayed. That is, in this embodiment, the jackpot round number display image 812 of the round game effect screen 81 does not change before and after the promotion failure effect is executed.

  39 (A) to 39 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the reserved villa finalization effect that is executed as the visual hindrance effect in the jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 39 (A), in the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect, first, on the round game effect screen 81, a movable accessory act effect is executed in which the movable accessory member 39 moves from the standby position to the actuated position. In the state where the movable accessory member 39 has moved to the operating position, the round game effect screen 81 is covered by the movable accessory member 39, and the visual recognition of the round game effect screen 81 is hindered. In other words, the movable accessory act effect in the reserved consecutive resort confirmation effect is executed as an effect that obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (B), in the reserved villa finalizing effect, the movable accessory member 39 returns from the operating position to the standby position after execution of the movable accessory operating effect, and the display screen is a round game effect screen 81. Shifts to the hold consecutive resort confirmation display screen 85 and returns to the round game effect screen 81 after a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 5 seconds) has elapsed. 39B is a screen that clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive resort is to be executed, and clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive resort that is “confirmed reserved consecutive resort” is to be executed. A character image 851 is included. This character image 851 is displayed as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81 so as to be superimposed on the entire round game effect screen 81 and obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 851 corresponds to the visual hindrance effect of the present invention.

  It should be noted that the reserved consecutive resort confirmed image is a reserved consecutive resort confirmed image that clearly shows that the reserved consecutive resort is executed without executing the movable accessory act effect, for example, the reserved consecutive resort confirmed image shown in FIG. It may be executed as an effect of displaying. In addition, the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect may be one that executes a movable accessory operating effect after moving to the button operation request screen 82 that displays an operation button image 821 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. Good. Further, in the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect, the movable accessory member 39 may be configured to include a display such as a liquid crystal display device, and this reserved consecutive resort finalized image may be displayed.

  40 (A) to 40 (C) are diagrams illustrating an example of a specific number-out game display effect executed as a visual hindrance effect in the jackpot game effect. As shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C), in the specific number ball appearance display effect, the display screen shifts from the round game effect screen 81 to the specific number ball appearance image display screen 86, and for a certain time (for example, After the elapse of 1 second to 5 seconds), the display screen returns from the specific number ball display image display screen 86 to the round game effect screen 81. The specific number appearing ball display image display screen 86 includes an image for notifying the player that the number of appearing balls has reached the specific number.

  Here, the specific number of balls display is, for example, a display for the cumulative number of balls that are added to the number of prize balls for winning the variable winning opening 316 in a series of jackpots (Renso jackpot) from the beginning. The so-called difference that is the difference between the number of balls hitting the game ball at the time of jackpot (out ball number) (or the number of game balls launched in the probability variation short-time mode that shifts after the jackpot game as well as the number of game balls launched at the time of the jackpot game) Executed as a display for the number of balls, or as a display for the total number of balls for which the number of winning balls from other winning ports such as the general winning port 313 is added in addition to the number of balls for the variable winning port 316. Is done.

  40B includes a character image 861 of “3000 shots OVER” for notifying that the number of appearing balls has reached 3000 pieces. This character image 861 is displayed as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81 so as to be superimposed on the entire round game effect screen 81, and obstructs the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 861 corresponds to the visual hindrance effect of the present invention. In addition, the specific number appearance game display image display screen 86 is not necessarily an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81. In other words, on the specific number-out game display image display screen 86, the character image 861 may be displayed without executing the round game effect in the lower layer.

  Here, the specific number is set to, for example, a positive integer multiple of the minimum specific number. The minimum specific number is set to 1000, for example. Of course, the specific number is not limited to 1000, but may be other numerical values such as 500 and 2000.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
Returning to the description of FIG. 36, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first to third promotion effect flags set to ON in step S2703 in the command determination process of FIG. It is determined whether or not a promotion effect is executed as a round game effect in the execution mode. If any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2901: YES), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag set to ON to OFF (step S2902), and performs the process. The process moves to step S2906. On the other hand, if any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to off (step S2901: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2903.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type is 5R jackpot. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is a 5R jackpot where the promotion effect can be executed, or a 16R jackpot where the promotion effect is not executed. Here, if the jackpot type is 5R jackpot (step S2903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2904, and if the jackpot type is not 5R jackpot (step S2903: No), that is, if 16R jackpot, The processing moves to step S2907.

<Step S2904 and Step S2905>
When the jackpot type is not the 5R jackpot (step S2903: No), the MPU 51 performs a lottery to execute the promotion failure effect (step S2904), and determines whether the result is to execute the promotion failure effect. (Step S2905). In other words, in the present embodiment, the promotion failure effect is executed when the lottery is won in the 5R jackpot. Of course, the promotion failure effect may always be executed when the promotion effect flag is set to OFF on condition that the jackpot type is 5R jackpot without performing the lottery.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 sets the number of rounds of the round game for executing the promotion effect to the second and subsequent rounds. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the number of round games for executing the promotion success effect to 2 on condition that any one of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2901: Yes). Set after the round. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 wins the lottery for executing the promotion failure effect on condition that all of the first to third promotion effect flags are set to OFF (step S2901: No) (step S2905: Yes), the number of rounds of the round game in which the promotion failure effect is executed is set to the second round and thereafter. For example, the MPU 51 determines a round for executing the promotion effect based on a lottery table (for example, a lottery table for which there is no winning value for executing the promotion effect in one round) for determining the promotion effect after the second round. To do. In the example shown in FIG. 37A, the promotion effect is set to be executed in four rounds.

  In step S2906, when the promotion effect that is the visual hindrance effect is executed, it is determined that the promotion effect is executed after the second round that avoids one round (specific round) that is the execution round of the specific character effect for the selected character. The promotion effect determined to avoid the specific round is executed in step S3404 in the round game effect process of FIG. 46 described later.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the reserved game flag set to ON in step S2802 in the jackpot effect determination process of FIG. 33 is set to ON, that is, the reserved game determined effect as a round game effect in the opening / closing execution mode. Determine whether to execute. When the reserved resort flag is set to ON (step S2907: YES), the MPU 51 sets the reserved resort flag to OFF (step S2908), and the process proceeds to step S2909. On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the visual hindrance effect determination process when the reserved consecutive flag is set to OFF (step S2906: No).

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In step S2909, the MPU 51 provisionally sets the number of rounds of the round game for executing the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect to the second and subsequent rounds on the condition that the reserved extended villa flag is set to ON (step S2907: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the round in which the temporarily set reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect matches the round in which the promotion effect is executed (step S2910). For example, the MPU 51 uses the lottery table (for example, a lottery table for which there is no winning value for executing the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect in one round) for determining the reserved consecutive resort finalized effect after two rounds. Decide on the round to perform the villa confirmation effect.

  Here, the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2909 when the temporarily set execution round of the reserved resort determination effect matches the execution round of the promotion effect (step S2910: Yes). In other words, until the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily set execution round of the reserved villa confirmation effect does not match the execution round of the promotion effect (step S2910: No), the MPU 51 temporarily determines the execution round of the reserved villa confirmation effect of step S2909. It is repeatedly determined whether or not the execution round of the provisional villa confirmation effect temporarily set in step S2910 matches the execution round of the promotion effect. On the other hand, when the execution round of the temporarily set reserved consecutive resort determination effect does not match the execution round of the promotion effect (step S2910: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2911.

<Step S2911>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 sets the execution round of the reserved consecutive villa confirmed effect temporarily set after the second round in step S2909 as the round for executing the reserved extended villa confirmed effect. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), it is set that the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect is executed in three rounds.

  Through these steps S2909 to S2911, when executing the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect that is a visual hindrance effect, the reserved consecutive after two rounds avoiding one round (specific round) that is the execution round of the specific character effect for the selected character. It is determined to execute the villa confirmation effect, and the reserved consecutive villa determination effect determined to avoid the specific round is executed in step S3406 in the round game effect process of FIG. 46 described later. Further, step S2910 prevents the execution round of the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect from being the same as the execution round of the promotion effect as well as the execution round of the specific character effect. On the other hand, the promotion (successful) effect and the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect, which are visual hindrance effects, are effects that clearly indicate to the player that the game situation is advantageous to the player. A visual hindrance effect such as a confirmed effect is not only executed in a round game different from the specific character effect for the selected character, but also the visual hindrance effects are prevented from being executed simultaneously or in the same round game. Therefore, the player is given the opportunity to execute the visual hindrance effect that clearly indicates that the game situation is advantageous to the player a plurality of times while fully enjoying the selected character by the specific character effect for the selected character. Thereby, the player can fully enjoy not only the specific character effect but also the visual hindrance effect in the jackpot game.

<Step S2912>
In step S2912, the MPU 51 calculates the estimated number of balls in the jackpot game with respect to the cumulative number of balls that are stored in the RAM 512 in the ball counting process executed in step S2712 of the command determination process in FIG. By adding, the cumulative number of balls at the end of the jackpot game is estimated. The estimated number of payouts is the number of winnings (count number) in which the variable winning opening 316 is closed before the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316 (for example, 30 seconds) with respect to the number of rounds according to the jackpot type, And it is estimated as a value obtained by multiplying the number of payout game balls (number of prize balls) for winning a prize to the variable winning opening 316. For example, when the 5R jackpot count is 9, and the number of prize balls for the variable winning opening 316 is 13, the estimated number of balls to be delivered is 5R × 9C × 13 = 585.

  As described above, the specific number of balls display is, for example, as a display for the cumulative number of balls that are added to the number of prize balls for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in a series of jackpots from the beginning (Renso jackpot), The so-called difference ball, which is the difference between the cumulative number of balls played and the number of game balls launched (number of balls played out) (or not only the number of game balls launched during the jackpot game but also the number of game balls launched in the probabilistic short-time mode that shifts after the jackpot game) This is executed as a display for the number, or as a display for the cumulative number of balls to which the number of winning balls from other winning ports such as the general winning port 313 is added, in addition to the cumulative number of balls for the winning ball number of the variable winning port 316. It is possible.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the round game effect of the jackpot game, it is determined first by fixing to one round of the specific character effect for the selected character (steps S2804 to S2806 in FIG. 33), and then the cumulative number of appearances is specified. By estimating the number of round games that will shift to the number, the execution round of the specific number-out appearance display effect as the visual hindrance display effect is determined after the second round avoiding the execution round of the specific character effect (steps S2913 to S2916 described later). .

  However, the number of launched game balls (number of out balls) and the number of prize balls from other winning holes are likely to vary, and it is difficult to estimate them in advance. It is difficult to accurately estimate a round game in which the number of balls to be played is a specific number or more in consideration of the number of winning balls from other winning openings. Therefore, in this step S2912, the number of winning balls for winning the variable winning opening 316, which does not need to consider the number of game balls to be launched (number of out balls) or the number of winning balls from other winning holes as the cumulative number of balls to be paid. Estimated as the number of balls that are added. In the present embodiment, the specific number payout display effect is executed on the basis of the cumulative number of payouts obtained by adding the number of winning balls for winning in the variable winning opening 316.

<Step S2913>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the estimated cumulative number of balls in step S2912 exceeds the unreached specific number among a plurality of predetermined specific numbers. For example, when the specific number is set to a positive integer multiple of 1000, which is the minimum specific number, and the cumulative number of balls to be stored stored in the RAM 512 at the start of the jackpot game is 1794, the cumulative number of balls at the end of the jackpot game Since there are 2379 (1794 + 585), the MPU 51 determines that the estimated cumulative number of balls in the current jackpot game exceeds a specific number. On the other hand, for example, if the cumulative number of balls to be stored stored in the RAM 512 at the start of the big jackpot game is 1170, the estimated number of balls to be played is 1755 (1170 + 5R × 9C × 13). In such a case, the MPU 51 determines that the estimated cumulative number of appearances does not exceed the specific number.

  Here, when the estimated accumulated number of balls exceeds the specific number (step S2913: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2914, and when the estimated cumulative number of balls does not exceed the specific number (step S2913: No). Then, the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process ends.

<Step S2914>
When the estimated accumulated number of balls exceeds the specific number (step S2913: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game exceeding the specific number is one round (step S2914). For example, in the estimation example of step S2912, 16 game balls won in the variable winning opening 316 (16C × 13 = 208) and the cumulative number of balls will be 2002 (1794 + 208). It can be estimated that the specific number exceeds 7 000 in 7C. In such a case, the MPU 51 estimates that the number of rounds in which the estimated cumulative number of appearances exceeds a specific number (specific number output display round) is two rounds.

  In the case of 5R jackpot, a round game in which the cumulative number of appearances exceeds a specific number (specific number appearance display round) is usually one time when the specific number is set to a positive integer multiple of 1000. is there. On the other hand, in the case of 16R jackpot, the estimated number of balls in a jackpot game may exceed 1000 (for example, 16R × 9C × 13 = 1872), so the estimated cumulative number of balls is a specific number. A round game exceeding a certain number (a specified number of rounds) may be two rounds. For example, in the case where the accumulated number of appearances is 1794, in addition to the above-mentioned two rounds, the estimated number of appearances at the end of the round is 3081 (1794 + 117 (= 1R number of appearances = 9C × 13) ) × 11) 11 rounds are also estimated as rounds in which the estimated cumulative number of appearances exceeds a specific number.

  Here, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2915 when the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of appearances exceeds the specific number is one round (step S2914: Yes), and the estimated cumulative number of appearances exceeds the specific number. When the game is not 1 round (step S2914: No), the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process is terminated.

<Step S2915>
When the number of round games in which the estimated cumulative number of appearances exceeds a specific number is one round (step S2914: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the specific number appearance information display flag for two rounds to ON (step S2915), and the visual recognition obstruction The effect determination process ends. This specific number-out game display flag is a flag indicating whether the game is a round game in which the specific-number game display is executed, and the specific-number game display is executed in the round game set to ON. In other words, when the specific number of balls display flag for two rounds is set to ON in this step S2915, the specific number of balls display is executed in two rounds. The specific number of ball display flag is referred to in step S3301 in the ball display processing of FIG.

<Step S2916>
When the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds the specific number is not one round (step S2914: No), the MPU 51 turns on the specific number of balls display flag corresponding to the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds the specific number. (Step S2916), and the visual recognition inhibition effect determination process is terminated.

[Error handling]
FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 are flowcharts showing an example of the error processing procedure executed in step S1910 of the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the error process, when an error occurs, a process for displaying an error in the symbol display unit 341 is executed. For example, when an error occurs during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode effect in the jackpot game, the display screen changes from the round game effect screen 81 shown in FIG. 43A to the error shown in FIG. 43B. The screen shifts to an image display screen 87 (priority display image screen). This error occurrence image display screen 87 is for notifying that an error has occurred and notifying the type of error, and in the example of FIG. 43B, it indicates that a magnet detection error has occurred. An error occurrence image 871 (priority display image) is displayed. The error occurrence image display screen 87 is a screen in which an error display image is superimposed as an overlay image of a screen such as the round game effect screen 81, for example, and is specified when an error is displayed during execution of the specific character effect. The visual recognition of the character effect is hindered. In the case of shifting to the error occurrence image display screen 87, error display may be performed without displaying the specific character effect as a lower layer of the error display. On the other hand, when the error is resolved, the display screen changes from the error occurrence image display screen 87 shown in FIG. 43B to the round game effect screen 81 shown in FIG. Returns to the display screen corresponding to the gaming state after the error is released.

  Furthermore, in the error processing of the present embodiment, when the error display at the time of the jackpot game hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect on the selected character, for example, when an error display is made during the execution of the specific character effect, If the specific character effect is executed as a lower layer of the error display while the display is being executed, if the execution of the specific character effect is canceled because the error display is being executed, the specific character effect is canceled after the error display is canceled. Enables the execution of production.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a conventional gaming machine that performs an effect on a character in a round game or the like in a jackpot game as described above. In general, in gaming machines, when an error occurs, it is notified that an error has occurred, for example, in a speaker or a symbol display unit. On the other hand, as an error, as described above, in addition to a normal error that does not need to be reported immediately after an error such as a ball clogging error, it is also an illegal detection that needs to be reported immediately after an error such as a magnet detection error. There is an error.

  However, the error notification is also performed in the jackpot game, and for example, an error image indicating that an error has occurred is displayed on the symbol display unit. Therefore, in the jackpot game, for example, an error display for a fraud detection error that needs to be notified immediately after the occurrence of an error is executed, so that the execution timing of the effect on the favorite character of the player and the display timing of the error image are May overlap. In this case, the visual recognition of the effect of the favorite character is hindered by the fraud detection error display. In addition, sensors for detecting fraud, such as the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the vibration detection sensor, may operate due to erroneous detection even when fraud is not actually performed. Therefore, even in a situation where the game is being played appropriately, the fraud detection error display hinders the visual recognition of the favorite character's performance. Furthermore, not only the fraud detection error display, but the display timing of the priority display image for notifying the information that needs to be displayed with priority over the character presentation overlaps with the execution timing of the character presentation. Visual recognition may be hindered. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the performance of the favorite character.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the priority display image such as the error occurrence image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the specific character effect. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can grasp whether the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the priority display image. Thereby, when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the priority display image, the compensation can be performed. For example, when the display of the priority display image ends when the priority display image inhibits the visual recognition of the specific character effect, for example, the display of the priority display image is executed after the display of the priority display image ends. It becomes possible to handle such as. Thereby, even if it is a case where visual recognition of a specific character effect is inhibited by priority display images, such as error occurrence image 871, a player can fully enjoy a specific character effect in a jackpot game.

  In the following, the case where the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, but compensation for the case where the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect, etc. The technical idea is not limited to the error occurrence image 871, and can be widely applied when the display timing of the priority display image for displaying information that needs to be displayed with priority over the character effect overlaps with the execution timing of the character effect. .

<Step S3001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 41, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the error occurrence flag set to ON in step S2720 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to ON. When the error occurrence flag is set on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3002, and when the error occurrence flag is set off (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process proceeds to S3007.

<Step S3002 to Step S3004>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 executes error display processing for displaying an error display image as an overlay image on the display screen at the time of error occurrence, sets the error display flag to ON (step S3003), and generates an error. The flag is set to off (step S3004). The error display flag indicates whether an error is being displayed, and is referred to in step S3008 of the error processing.

<Step S3005>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is one round of the opening and closing execution mode, that is, whether or not a specific character effect is being executed as a round game effect in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game. The determination as to whether the opening / closing execution mode is one round can be made based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when, for example, the round game effect start flag is set to ON in step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. . When the MPU 51 is in one round of the opening / closing execution mode (step S3005: Yes), that is, when the specific character effect is being executed when an error occurs, the process proceeds to step S3006. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 is not in one round of the opening / closing execution mode (step S3005: NO), that is, when the specific character effect is not executed when an error occurs, the MPU 51 ends the error processing.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, if the MPU 51 is in one round of the opening / closing execution mode (step S3005: Yes), that is, if it is executed by an error display at a timing at which the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered, the MPU 51 sets the specific character effect carryover execution flag. Set to on. The specific character effect carry-over execution flag indicates that the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the error display. Based on the specific character effect carry-over execution flag, the MPU 51 recognizes the specific character effect by the error display. In the case of inhibition, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific character effect after canceling the error display.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of error, when the error is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when an error occurs and the error display is executed at a timing at which the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered, the specific character is displayed. Production carryover execution is set to on. However, when an error display is executed at a timing at which the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered, an error display is displayed when an error that requires urgency to notify a fraud detection error or the like is generated, while a normal error is displayed. If an error that does not require urgency, such as an error, occurs, the error display immediately after the error may not be displayed. In this case, when an error that does not require urgency, such as a normal error, has been resolved at the stage where the specific character effect is finished, there is no need to display the error again. If an error that does not require urgency, such as a normal error, has not been resolved at the stage where the specific character effect is completed, error display may be started after the specific character effect ends. By doing in this way, it can prevent that the visual recognition of a specific character effect is inhibited by generation | occurrence | production of the minor error which does not require urgency.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, if the error occurrence flag is set to off (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 sets the error elimination flag set to on in step S2722 in the command determination process of FIG. Judge whether or not. When the error elimination flag is set on (step S3007: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3010 in FIG. 42, and when the error elimination flag is set off (step S3007: NO). The processing moves to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, when both the error occurrence flag and the error resolution flag are set to OFF (NO in both steps S3001 and S3007), the MPU 51 sets the error display flag indicating whether an error is being displayed to ON. Determine whether or not. When the error display flag is set on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3009, and when the error display flag is set off (step S3008: NO), the error processing is performed. Exit.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set on. If the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set on (step S3009: Yes), the error process is performed. Exit. On the other hand, when the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to OFF (step S3009: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3005. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the execution of the specific character effect is started during the error display. Thereby, even if it is a case where the visual recognition of a specific character effect is inhibited by execution of a specific character effect being started while an error is being displayed (error is being generated), the MPU 51 can cancel the specific character after canceling the error display. It becomes possible to execute the production.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
When the error elimination flag is set to on (step S3007: Yes), in step S3010 shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 51 cancels the error display and further sets the error display flag to off (step S3011). The error elimination flag is set to off (step S3012).

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character effect carryover execution flag set to ON in step S3006 of FIG. 41 is set to ON. When the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to S3014. On the other hand, when the specific character effect carry-over execution flag is set to OFF (S3013: No), the MPU 51 ends the error process without executing the specific character effect.

<Steps S3014 and S3015>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 sets the specific character effect carry-over execution flag to OFF, and whether the round game effect execution flag set to ON in step S3402 in the round game effect process of FIG. 46 described later is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3015). The round game effect execution flag indicates whether or not a round game effect execution is being executed. Based on the round game effect execution flag, it can be determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is set.

  Here, when the round game effect execution flag is set to ON (step S3015: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3016 and when the round game effect execution flag is set to OFF (step S3015). : No), the error processing is terminated. That is, the MPU 51 executes the ending effect although the jackpot game has not ended, in addition to the case where the jackpot game has ended, even when the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to ON. In this case, the error process is terminated without executing the specific character effect.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 determines whether there is an undigested round game when the error is released. For example, when the round game start effect flag is set to ON in step S2710 in the command determination process of FIG. 30, the determination as to whether there is an undigested round game can be made based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512. it can. When there is an undigested round game (step S3016: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3017, and when there is no undigested round game (step S3016: No), the process proceeds to step S3018. .

<Steps S3017 and S3018>
In step S3017, when there is an undigested round game (step S3016: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a specific character effect in the RAM 512 as a round game effect of the next round game to be executed (rewrite of the round game effect). And the error processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S3018, if there is no undigested round game (step S3016: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the error is canceled in the final round game and that the specific character effect can be executed in the ending. In at least a part of the ending, the ending effect is reset so as to execute the specific character effect, and the error processing ends.

  As described above, in steps S3017 and S3018, it is determined that the specific character effect is executed when there is an undigested round game after the error is released, or when the ending effect is not executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a specific character effect within a time shorter than the digestion time + interval of one round from the error cancellation, thereby enabling the specific character effect to be executed in a short time from the error cancellation. Become.

  Here, when resetting the ending effect so as to execute the specific character effect, the MPU 51 uses either the same character effect or the different character effect as the specific character effect whose visual display is hindered by the error display as the specific character effect. Execution may be determined. Further, when the MPU 51 decides to execute a character effect different from the specific character effect whose visual recognition is hindered by the error display, the MPU 51 is used for the ending effect that is not executed in the character effect normally executed in the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect. You may make it determine execution of the special special character production with a low selection rate compared with the special special character production specialized or another specific character production. As a special specific character effect, for example, it is conceivable to display an image for a selected character in a special costume or pose. As described above, even when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is inhibited by executing the rare effect or the premier effect for the specific character as compensation for the visual recognition of the specific character effect being inhibited, It is possible to reduce feelings such as frustration and dissatisfaction of the player by executing a special specific character effect.

  In the error processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when there is an undigested round game after the error is released, or when the ending effect is not executed, it is determined to execute the specific character effect. In addition to this condition, it may be determined whether to execute the specific character effect after canceling the error by lottery. In this case, for example, a lottery may be performed before the execution of step S3016, or before the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to ON in step S3006, it is determined by lottery whether the flag is set to ON. It may be determined whether to execute the specific character effect by lottery. When determining whether to execute the specific character effect by lottery, even if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is obstructed by the error occurrence image 871, the specific character effect may or may not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a surprise feeling by executing the specific character effect after canceling the display of the error occurrence image 871, thereby improving the interest of the jackpot game.

  In the error processing described above, when the error display period overlaps with the execution period of the specific character effect, that is, an error occurs during execution of one round as a round game, or execution of one round is started while an error occurs. In this case, the specific character effect is executed after the error is released. However, when the overlap period of the error display period and the execution period of the specific character effect is short, for example, the overlap period is the maximum execution period per round of the specific character effect (the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316 (for example, 30 seconds)). If it is 10% or less, it is considered that the player is enjoying the specific character effect for a considerable period. Therefore, when the overlap period of the error display period and the execution period of the specific character effect is short, the specific character effect may not be executed after the error is released.

  In the error processing of this embodiment, while the error occurrence image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the specific character effect, so that the specific character effect is visually recognized by the error occurrence image 871. You can see if it was hindered. Accordingly, when the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect, it is possible to compensate for it. For example, in this embodiment, when the error occurrence image 871 inhibits the visual recognition of the specific character effect, when the error occurrence image 871 is canceled by eliminating the error, the inhibited specific character effect is canceled by the error. A visual hindrance effect is executed in a later undigested round game or ending. Thereby, even if it is a case where the visual recognition of a specific character effect is inhibited by the priority display image, the player can fully enjoy the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

  In the above, the case where the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect has been described. However, the priority display image for informing the information other than the error occurrence image 871 that needs to be displayed with priority over the character effect. The same effect can be obtained also when the display timing of is overlapped with the character performance execution timing.

[Big hit game effect processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process executed in step S1912 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, the ending effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect and the like determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 are executed.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 executes a number-of-balls display process for displaying on the symbol display unit 341 that the cumulative number of balls is equal to or greater than a specific number. Details of the number-of-balls display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2708 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to ON. If the jackpot game effect start flag is ON ( In step S3202: Yes, the process proceeds to step S3203. If the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3207.

<Step S3203>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a so-called first hit (step S3203). Here, the first win is, for example, a big hit when the lottery result in the big win game lottery is a big hit in a normal non-short-time gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). Then, when the jackpot is the first hit (step S3203: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3204. When the jackpot is not the first hit (step S3203: No), the process proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
If the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the first jackpot (step S3203: YES), the MPU 51 sets the first specific number in the RAM 512 (step S3204). Here, the first specific number is the minimum specific number in the case where the specific number of balls is displayed, and is set to 1000, for example. Of course, the first specific number (minimum specific number) is not limited to 1000, and may be other numbers such as 500 and 2000.

<Steps S3205 and S3206>
The MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to OFF (step S3205), executes an opening effect start process (step S3206), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the opening effect start processing, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the lighting unit 27 to execute the sound effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2803 in FIG. 33, and also causes the display control device 6 as the opening effect. A command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute the image effect is transmitted.

<Step S3207>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S3202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag set to on in step S2710 of the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on. If the round game effect start flag is on (step S3207: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3208. If the round game effect start flag is off (step S3207: No), the process proceeds to step S3212. Migrate to

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game is one round. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the opening effect. The determination of whether or not the round game is one round can be made based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when, for example, the round game effect start flag is set to ON in step S2710 in the command determination process of FIG. . When the round is one round (step S3208: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3209. When the round is not one round (step S3208: No), the process proceeds to step S3210.

<Step S3209>
When the round is one round (step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an opening effect end process (step S3209). That is, the MPU 51 executes the opening effect end process when the round game start flag is turned on during the opening effect.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
In step S3210, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to OFF, further executes the round game effect (step S3211), and ends the jackpot game effect process. That is, the MPU 51 starts a round game effect corresponding to the round game among the opening / closing execution mode effects determined in step S2806 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. In addition, when it is determined in step S2808 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 that the MPU 51 executes at least one of the promotion effect that is a visual hindrance effect and the reserved villa finalization effect in the round game, The visual obstruction effect is executed. Details of the round game effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3212>
In step S3212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag set to ON in step S2714 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to ON. If the ending start flag is ON (step S3212: Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S3213, and if the ending start flag is OFF (step S3212: No), the process proceeds to step S3215.

<Steps S3213 and S3214>
When the ending start flag is on (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to off (step S3213), executes the ending effect start process (step S3214), and ends the jackpot game effect process. To do. In the ending effect starting process, the MPU 51 causes the ending effect determined in step S2807 of the jackpot game effect determining process of FIG. 33 to be started by effecting means such as the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the symbol display unit 341. If the ending effect is reset in step S3018 in the error process of FIG. 42, the ending effect reset by the error process is executed instead of the ending effect determined by the jackpot game effect determining process.

  Note that the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display an image relating to the appearance such as the number of appearances in the jackpot game and the total number of appearances in the renso as an ending effect. In addition, the ending effect may be a display of a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that the reserved consecutive resort is executed. These images are determined in step S3214, for example. In addition, when the MPU 51 executes the reserved villa confirmation effect in the ending effect separately from the reserved villa determination effect as the visual hindrance effect, the MPU 51 displays the reserved villa determined image on the symbol display unit 341 before the ending effect is started. The reserved villa confirmation effect such as the display and the output of the reserved villa confirmation sound from the speaker 26 is determined.

<Step S3215>
In step S3215, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2716 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to ON, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON ( In step S3215: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3216. If the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S3215: No), the jackpot game effect processing is ended.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3215: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S3216), executes an ending effect end process (step S3217), and the jackpot game The production process ends.

[Outlet display effect processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ball display effect process executed in step S3201 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. In the payout display effect process, when the cumulative number of payouts due to winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot game exceeds the specific number, the specific number Perform display effects. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when it is expected that a specific number of ball display will be executed in one round in which a specific character effect for the selected character is executed, a process of performing a specific number of ball display in two rounds is executed. To do.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, the overlay image for informing that the result of the promotion effect and the reserved villa is confirmed as described above is displayed on the symbol display unit, thereby obstructing the visual recognition of the effect on the character. The Here, as the overlay image, for example, a payout display image displayed on the symbol display unit every time a certain number of game balls are acquired in the jackpot game can be cited. Since this ball display image is displayed whenever the number of acquired game balls exceeds a certain number, the ball display image is displayed at the timing when the player's favorite character effect is executed. Thus, the visual recognition of the favorite character's performance may be hindered. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the performance of the favorite character.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is expected that the ball display is executed in one round in which the specific character effect for the selected character is executed, the ball display is performed in two rounds. Processing to be performed is realized. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific character image effect in the jackpot game without hindering the visual recognition of the specific character effect on the selected character by the ball display.

<Step S3301>
In step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific number-out game display flag set to ON in step S2915 or S2916 of the visual inhibition effect determining process in FIG. 36 is set to ON for the round game. To do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game corresponds to a round game in which a specific number of ball display effects are executed. Here, when the specific number appearance ball display flag is set on for the round game (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3302, and the specific number appearance ball display flag is off. Is set (step S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3306.

<Step S3302>
In step S3302, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the cumulative number of balls counted in the ball counting process of step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is greater than or equal to a specific number. Here, the specific number is an integral multiple of 1000, for example. When the accumulated number of balls is greater than or equal to the specific number (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3303, and when the accumulated number of balls is less than the specific number (step S3302: No), The production process ends.

<Steps S3303 to 3305>
In step S3303, the MPU 51 displays a specific number of ball display image display screen 86 (FIG. 40) in which a specific number of ball images are displayed on the symbol display unit 341 from the round game effect screen 81 (see FIG. 40A). (See (B)), and the specific number ball display image display screen flag is set ON (step S3304), and the specific number ball display flag set ON for the round game is turned OFF. The setting is made (step S3305), and the corresponding ball display effect processing is ended. This specific number-out ball display image display screen flag is a flag indicating whether a specific number-out ball image is displayed (whether a specific-number ball appearance image effect is being executed). In addition, when the specific number of ball display image display screen flag is set to ON in step S3304, time measurement after the flag is turned on is started.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific number ball display image display screen flag set to ON in step S3304 is set to ON, and sets the specific number ball display image display screen flag to ON. If yes (step S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3307. If the specific number of ball display image display screen flag is set to OFF (step S3306: No), the ball display effect processing is performed. finish.

<Step S3307>
In step S <b> 3307, the MPU 51 shifts to the specific number of ball display image display screen (after the specific number of ball display image display screen flag is set to ON), and then a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 10 seconds). Second) is determined. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a ball display effect has been executed for a predetermined time (whether a specific number of ball display images have been displayed for a predetermined time). When the predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the specific number ball display image display screen (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S3308, and from the transition to the specific number ball display image display screen. If the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3308: No), the presenting ball display effect process ends.

<Steps S3308 and S3309>
In step S3308, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the specific number of ball display image display screen (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the specific number of ball display image display screen 86 to a round game effect. The screen is returned to the screen 81 (see FIGS. 40B and 40C), and the specific number of ball display image display screen flag is set to OFF (step S3309), and the ball display effect processing is ended.

[Round game effect processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect process executed in step S3211 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. In the round game effect process, the round game effect in the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in step S2806 in the jackpot game effect determination process in FIG. 33 and the visual inhibition effect determined in step S2808 are executed in the round game.

<Steps S3401 and S3402>
In step S3401, the MPU 51 executes the round game effect for the corresponding round, and further sets the round game effect execution flag to ON (step S3402). The round game effect execution flag indicates whether a round game effect is being executed (whether it is in the opening / closing execution mode), and it is determined whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode in step S3015 in the error processing of FIG. Referenced for.

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the execution round of the promotion effect set in the RAM 512 in step S2906 of the visual inhibition effect determination process in FIG. If the MPU 51 is in the promotion effect execution round (step S3403: YES), the MPU 51 ends the round game effect processing after executing the promotion effect (step S3404). Here, the promotion effect is executed when the round game effect start flag is ON (step S3207 in FIG. 44: Yes), that is, at the start of the round game, but the promotion effect may be executed at another timing. . For example, the promotion effect may be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period after the start of the round game, or may be executed during the interval. If the visual hindrance effect is executed during the interval, the execution timing of the specific character effect executed in the round game can be avoided from overlapping with the execution timing of the visual hindrance effect. Can prevent visual recognition from being hindered.

  On the other hand, when it is not the execution round of the promotion effect (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to S3405 without executing the promotion effect.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is an execution round of the reserved consecutive resort determination effect set in the RAM 512 in step S2911 of the visual inhibition effect determination process of FIG. If the MPU 51 is the execution round of the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect (step S3405: Yes), after executing the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect (step S3406), the MPU 51 ends the round game effect processing. Here, in the same way as the promotion effect, the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect is executed when the round game effect start flag is on (step S3207: Yes in FIG. 44), that is, at the start of the round game. The hold consecutive villa confirmation effect may be executed. For example, the reserved consecutive resort confirmation effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the round game, or may be executed during the interval.

  On the other hand, when it is not the execution round of the reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect (step S3405: No), the MPU 51 ends the round game effect processing without executing the reserved consecutive resort finalized effect.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, in the jackpot game, the specific character image effect mainly composed of the selected character selected by the player is at a timing different from the visual hindrance effect. It is executed in a specific round game (fixed to one round in this embodiment). Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific character image effect in the jackpot game without obstructing the visual recognition of the specific character image effect.

  In the gaming machine 10, a specific character image effect is executed in a specific round such as one round. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the round game in which the specific character image effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the specific character image effect for the selected character by paying attention to the variable winning opening 316, for example.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the error occurrence image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the specific character effect, and the specific character effect is determined based on the error occurrence image 871. When the display of the error occurrence image 871 is canceled by eliminating the error when the visual recognition of the image is inhibited, the inhibited specific character effect is executed after the error display is released. Thereby, even if it is a case where the visual recognition of the specific character effect is inhibited by the error occurrence image 871, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific character effect in the jackpot game.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot game, the specific character effect mainly composed of the selected character selected by the player is executed in a single round, and the visual hindrance effect is executed in a game other than the first round. Explained. That is, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, the specific character effect (selected subject image effect) mainly composed of the selected character (specific selection subject) selected by the player is executed at a timing different from the visual inhibition effect. An example has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the specific character effect and the execution timing of the visual inhibition effect are determined, and when there is an overlap between these execution timings, the execution timing of one effect is re-determined. This is different from the embodiment.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when at least a part of the first timing for executing the specific character effect and the second timing for executing the visual hindrance effect overlap, one of the first timing and the second timing. Is determined again at a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to avoid in advance that the specific character effect is obstructed by the visual recognition effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the specific character effect is determined at random without fixing the specific character effect to one round that is a specific unit game as in the first embodiment described above. The Thereby, since it becomes possible to pay attention to the symbol display unit 341 in order to confirm the specific character effect, it is possible to actively appreciate the effect on characters other than the selected character, and to improve the goodness of characters other than the selected character. An opportunity to confirm is given.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. 47 and 48 are a 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table and a 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table which are referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the visual inhibition effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment.

  This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the execution timing of the specific character effect is randomly determined as described above. Therefore, the game effect determination process is different from the first embodiment. 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (see FIG. 47) and 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (see FIG. 48), and the procedure of the visual inhibition effect determination process executed by the sound lamp control device (see FIG. 47). 49)) is different.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the present embodiment is defined such that the selected character can be determined in any of rounds 1 to 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the present embodiment is defined such that the selected character can be determined in any of rounds 1 to 16.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the visual inhibition effect determination process of the present embodiment, after a round game for executing the promotion effect as the visual recognition inhibition effect is provisionally determined (step S3501), the round for executing the temporarily set promotion effect is executed. When the game does not overlap with the round game that executes the specific character effect (step S3502: No), the temporarily set round game of the promotion effect is set as the round game that executes the promotion effect as it is (step S3503). On the other hand, when the temporarily set round game overlaps with the round game that executes the specific character effect (step S3502: Yes), the round game that executes the promotion effect is temporarily set again (step S3501).

  Similarly, after temporarily determining the round game for executing the reserved consecutive villa finalizing effect as the visual hindrance effect (step S2907), the round game for executing the temporarily set reserved consecutive resort finalizing effect performs the round game Is not duplicated (step S2908: No), and if it does not overlap with the round game that executes the specific character effect (step S3504: No), the temporarily set round game of the promoted effect is retained as it is. (Step S3505). On the other hand, when the temporarily set round game overlaps with the round game that executes the promotion effect or the round game that executes the specific character effect (Yes in step S2908 or S3502: Yes), Temporary setting is performed again (step S2907).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the round game that is expected to exceed the specific number of betting display overlaps with the round game that executes the specific character effect (step S2912: Yes), the current round game is the final round game. (Step S3506: Yes), that is, if there is no unrounded round game, a setting is made to display a specific number of balls in the ending (step S3507). On the other hand, if the current round game is not the final round game (step S3506: No), that is, if there is an undigested round game, a specific number of balls will be displayed in the next round game in which the specific character effect is executed. Is set for the round game to be executed (step S3508).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when the round game for executing the promotion effect and the reserved villa confirmation effect as the visual hindrance effect and the round game for executing the specific character effect is determined in an overlapping manner, the visual hindrance effect is determined. The round game that executes is determined again as a round game that does not overlap with the specific character effect. Also, the ball display effect as the visual hindrance effect is also executed in the next round game or ending after the execution of the specific character effect. Therefore, it is possible to avoid in advance that the specific character effect is obstructed by the visual recognition effect. Further, by determining the round game for executing the specific character effect and re-deciding the round game for executing the visual hindrance effect as necessary, the specific character effect is not executed fixedly to the specific round game. A loud game in which a specific character effect is executed at random is determined. Thereby, since it becomes possible to pay attention to the symbol display unit 341 in order to confirm the specific character effect, it is possible to actively appreciate the effect on characters other than the selected character, and to improve the goodness of characters other than the selected character. An opportunity to confirm is given.

  In this embodiment, the specific character effect is determined first, and then the promotion effect and the reserved villa finalizing effect are randomly determined. However, the specific character effect is not executed for the promotion effect and the reserved villa finalizing effect. The timing may be determined intentionally. For example, a round game in which a specific character effect is not executed may be extracted, and a round game in which a promotion effect or a reserved consecutive resort determination effect is executed may be determined from the extracted round games. Even in this case, it can be avoided in advance that the specific character effect is obstructed by the visual recognition effect. In addition, since it is not necessary to determine whether the execution timing of the promotion effect and the reserved villa finalizing effect overlaps with the execution timing of the specific character effect, it is not necessary to redetermine the promotion effect and the reserved villa finalizing effect, The processing burden on the MPU 51 is reduced.

  In addition, the visual obstruction effect such as the promotion effect and the reserved villa finalization effect is determined first, then the specific character effect is determined, and the execution timing of the specific character effect overlaps with the execution timing of the visual obstruction effect. You may make it re-determine the execution timing of character production. In addition, if the current round game is the final round game, the ending display effect was executed at the ending, but if there is no unresolved round game, the ending display effect is not executed at the ending. May be omitted.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the specific character effect cannot be visually recognized at all by performing error display has been described (see FIG. 43B). On the other hand, this embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that an error display is performed so that a specific character effect can be visually recognized.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of error processing executed by the sound lamp control device, and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of error display on the symbol display unit in the error processing of the present embodiment. .

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the error processing of the present embodiment, when an error occurs (step S3001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific character effect is being executed (step S3601), and the specific character effect is performed. Is being executed (step S3601: YES), an error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (step S3002), and the specific character effect is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (step S3002). S3602). Note that the reduction rate and arrangement of the specific character effect are not particularly limited as long as the visual recognition of the specific character effect is not hindered.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 so that the specific character effect can be visually recognized. That is, the specific character effect is executed in a predetermined region of the error display image 871 with a size smaller than the display size before the error display image 871 is displayed, so that the error display image 871 is displayed as a symbol. Even when displayed on the part 341, it is visible. Thus, even when the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the player can enjoy the selected character image effect in the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the specific character effect is reduced and executed in a part of the area of the error display image 871, but as shown in FIG. 52, an error occurs in a part of the display area 81 of the specific character effect. The display image 872 may be displayed. In the example of FIG. 52, the error display image 872 is displayed at the center of the upper part of the round game effect screen 81, but the position where the error display image 872 is displayed is the left part as long as the visual recognition of the specific character effect is not hindered. Further, positions other than the positions shown in FIG. Further, the size of the error display image 872 is not particularly limited as long as it does not hinder the visual recognition of the specific character effect.

  Here, as the error, there is a normal error that does not need to be notified immediately after the occurrence of an error such as a ball clogging error as described above. In such a normal error, the urgency of notifying the occurrence of the error is lower than the fraud detection error. Absent.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the specific character effect is executed in the jackpot game in which the error has occurred after the error is canceled when the error has prevented the specific character effect from being visually recognized has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the error of the specific character effect is obstructed due to the occurrence of an error, the first character described above is executed in the next big hit game instead of the big hit game in which the error has occurred. This is different from the embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the sound lamp control device of this embodiment, and FIG. 54 shows the error processing executed by the sound lamp control device of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment, when the specific character effect stock flag is on (step S3701: Yes), the timing for executing the specific character effect is determined as the stock effect determination process. The This specific character effect stock flag triggers the transition to the previous jackpot game when the error process shown in FIG. 54 causes an error to prevent visual recognition of the specific character effect (step S3005: Yes). On the condition that the determined result is a probable big hit (step S3802).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as a compensation in the case where the visual display of the specific character effect is obstructed by displaying the error display image on the symbol display unit 341 in the previous jackpot game, it is visually recognized in the special game. The specific character effect for the amount of hindrance is executed. Thereby, even if it is a case where the visual recognition of a specific character effect is inhibited by the error display image, the player can fully enjoy the selected character image effect in the next jackpot game.

  In particular, if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the error display image in the probability variation jackpot game, if the specific character effect corresponding to the visual recognition hindrance in the next jackpot game is executed, the game is a jackpot game The selected character image effect for which the visual recognition is hindered is executed as the bonus, and the player can enjoy the bonus. Moreover, on condition that the jackpot game is being executed, the privilege when the visual display of the specific character effect is obstructed by displaying the error display image on the symbol display unit 341 is hardly a privilege. It can be prevented that it is performed earlier.

  In addition, in the stock effect determination process in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 53, for example, in one jackpot game, in addition to the specific character effect determined by the jackpot game, the specific character effect executed by the stock is added. It may be determined that the specific character effect is executed twice or more. In that case, the specific character effect determined by the jackpot game may be determined as an effect different from the specific character effect executed by the specific character effect stock executed by the stock, and the specific character executed more than once One of the effects may be executed at the opening, and the remaining specific character effects may be executed at the round game.

  If the specific character effect is determined in this way, if the error display image obstructs the visual recognition of the specific character effect in the previous jackpot game, the selected character image effect in the jackpot game is different from other specific character effects as compensation. Are executed as different effects. Therefore, by executing the same specific character effect twice or more, it is possible to suppress the feeling of getting tired of the specific character effect. In particular, by executing the opening of a specific character effect that is executed as compensation, compared to the case where the same specific character effect is executed twice or more in a plurality of round games, the feeling of getting tired of the specific character effect is felt. It is possible to effectively suppress holding. In addition, since the player can enjoy compensation as a benefit that the visual recognition of the specific character effect is inhibited by the error display image as an effect different from the other selected character image effects, the jackpot game Can enjoy more.

  In addition, the specific character effect executed by stock may be executed as a special specific character effect with a low application rate, or as a special specific character effect executed only as a specific character effect at the time of stocking. If it does in this way, a special specific character production will be performed in the next jackpot game as compensation for the visual recognition of a specific character production being inhibited. Therefore, even when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered, it is possible to reduce emotions such as the player's irritation and dissatisfaction at that time by executing the special character effect.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot game, the case where the specific character effect mainly composed of the selected character selected by the player is executed fixedly in one round has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect that is executed at a predetermined timing in the floating game that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state (in the present embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed). It differs from the first embodiment described above in that the effect on the character in the final image game effect (the opportunity game image effect) that has been executed is executed in at least one of the opening and the first round.

  By the way, in a conventional game machine, there is one that executes a character effect that displays a still image such as a character introduction image in addition to a video such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in a variable game effect in a jackpot game.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect on the character in the jackpot game is determined at random, and the effect character (specific effect subject) that is mainly displayed in the reach effect (specific effect subject image effect) in the variable game effect ). On the other hand, from a player's point of view, there is a considerable attachment and appreciation for the characters in the floating game that triggered the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, an effect character effect on the effect character in the trigger game image effect that was executed at a predetermined timing in the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state (( Special game) specific effect subject image effect) is executed in at least one of the opening and the first round. Therefore, the effect character effect is executed in the jackpot game in a relatively short time after the end of the variable game, in other words, in a relatively short time after the end of the final image game effect in the variable game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect character in the final image game effect even in the jackpot game in a state where the remnant such as the reach effect in the variable game that has been a big hit opportunity remains. Thereby, it is possible to further enjoy the effect character in the jackpot game.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 56 is referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character effect data table, and FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect determination table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG.

  In the jackpot game effect determination process of this embodiment shown in FIG. 55, before determining the opening effect and the opening / closing execution mode effect (before step S2803), the variable game for the variable game triggered by the transition to the jackpot game. The final image game effect type executed at the timing when the main symbol in the effect is stopped and displayed, and the effect character in the final image game effect are specified (step S3901).

  Then, the MPU 51 refers to the jackpot gaming character effect data table shown in FIG. 56 and determines the effect to be executed at the opening (step S2802). Further, the MPU 51 refers to the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 56 and the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG.

  Here, the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 56 determines the character type that appears in the opening effect of the jackpot game and the character type for determining the scenario in the round game effect of the jackpot game. The MPU 51 refers to the steps S3902 and S3904 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. In the jackpot game character effect data table, the character type that appears in the opening effect according to the final image game effect type (reach effect type) that was executed at the timing when the main symbol in the variable game is stopped and displayed, and the round A character type for determining a game effect scenario is defined. In addition, the character type for determining the round game effect scenario is defined according to whether or not the jackpot type (probable jackpot and normal jackpot) and the reserved villa finalizing effect are executed.

  Specifically, in the variable game effect that triggered the jackpot game, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, the opening character is not the effect character in the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, A non-selected character that is not a selected character among the characters 1 to 4 is determined. That is, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, the effect character effect for the effect character is not executed in the opening, and the specific character effect for the selected character is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the final image game effects are the super reach effects Y1 to Y5, the effect characters 5 to 9 in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 are determined as the characters for determining the scenario of the round game effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 57, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 55, according to the characters 1 to 9 for determining the scenario of the round game effect, A production scenario table is set for each of the characters 1-9. In any effect scenario table for any character 1-9, a scenario is determined in which the effect characters 5-9 in the super reach effects Y1-Y5 are executed in one round of the round game. For example, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1, the effect character effect for the character 9 is round game according to the “character 9 effect scenario table” for the character 9 that is the effect character in the super reach effect Y1. A scenario to be executed in one round of production is determined.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 56, when the final image game effect is the special reach effect Z1 to Z5, as the opening character, any of the effect characters 1 to 4 in the special reach effect Z1 to Z5 or the characters 1 to 20 ( Everyone) is decided. That is, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, the effect character effect for the effect character is executed in the opening, and when there are a plurality of effect characters, the effect character effect in which those characters are displayed is executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the final image game effect is the special reach effect Z1 to Z5, as a character for determining the scenario of the round game effect, whether the determination result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a promising big hit, If the reserved villa is confirmed, the selected character is determined, and if the reserved villa is not confirmed, the selected character is not one of the characters 5 to 9 (other than the characters 1 to 4). A non-selected character is determined. That is, when the final image game effect is the super reach effect Y1 to Y5, in the opening / closing execution mode, the specific character effect for the selected character is one round of the round game when it is a probable big hit or the reserved villa is confirmed. (See FIG. 57). In this case, when the effect character and the selected character are the same, the specific character effect is executed in one round as the effect character effect.

  Further, when the final image game effects are normal reach effects X1 to X5, the selected character is determined as the opening character and the character for determining the scenario of the round game effect. On the other hand, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, the selected character is determined as the effect character. That is, when the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5, the effect character effect (specifically selected character) for the effect character (selected character) in the normal reach effect X1 to X5 in both the opening and the round of the round game. Executed. In other words, when the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5, and the effect character and the selected character are the same, the specific character effect (effect character) for the selected character in both the opening and the first round of the round game. Effect character effect) is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the character in the opening effect is determined according to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect, and the scenario effect in the round game (character effect in one round) is determined. The character to be played is determined according to the reach type in the final image game effect, the effect character type, the jackpot type (probability change jackpot and normal jackpot), and whether or not the reserved villa is executed. The effect determined in this way is executed by the MPU 51 in the jackpot game. As a result, in the present embodiment, the effect character effect for the effect character in the final image game effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and the execution other than the opening and the first round is restricted. Accordingly, the jackpot game can be enjoyed in a manner that reflects the final image game effect in the variable game that has been a trigger for the transition to the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the production character effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and execution in other than the opening and the first round is restricted. In the case of a game situation that is advantageous to the player as in the case of a jackpot game, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and one round. Thereby, the player can enjoy a production character production several times as a privilege in the case of an advantageous game situation.

  In addition, when the effect character effect is performed in both the opening and the first round when the effect character in the final image game effect and the selected character are the same as in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, the opening and the first round It can be considered that the effect character effect is executed as a different effect. In this case, the player can enjoy different effects of the effect character (selected character) twice for the opening and the first round.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the round game effect scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game effect scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case is described in which the opportunity game image effect is the final image game effect that was executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed, but is executed at a time other than the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. You may make it perform the specific character production with respect to the character in the opportunity game image production which had been performed in an opening and at least one of 1 round.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the scenario for the round game effect in the opening / closing execution mode is determined based on the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 57, but the character for determining the scenario for the round game effect is selected. In the case of a character, an effect scenario (round game effect) in the opening / closing execution mode may be determined based on the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (see FIGS. 47 and 48) in the second embodiment. . In this case, the round game in which the specific character effect for the selected character is executed in the opening / closing execution mode is determined even if it is not one round (after two rounds). In other words, when the effect character is the same as the selected character, as in the case where the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5 effect, the effect character effect (specific character effect) for the effect character (selected character) is The game is executed in round games other than the opening and the first round, for example, after the second round. Thereby, in order to check the effect character effect (specific character effect) with respect to the effect character (selected character), it is possible to make the symbol display unit 341 pay attention in the round game. Therefore, characters other than the effect character (selected character) It is possible to positively appreciate the effect on the character, and an opportunity to confirm the goodness of characters other than the effect character (selected character) is given. In addition, when conditions other than the case where the production character is the same as the selected character are satisfied, for example, when the reach type is a special reach production, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a promising big hit In such a case, the effect character may be executed in round games after two rounds.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described fifth embodiment, the character in the opening effect is determined according to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect, and the effect scenario (character effect in one round) in the round game is determined. Is determined according to the reach type in the final image game effect, the effect character type, the jackpot type (probability jackpot and normal jackpot), and whether or not the reserved consecutive villa is executed. The case where the effect character effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first round has been described.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the character for determining the opening effect character and the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) is defined according to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect. In common with the fifth embodiment described above, not only a character for determining an effect scenario in a round game (character effect in one round) but also a character in the opening effect It differs from the fifth embodiment described above in that it is defined according to the jackpot type (probability jackpot and normal jackpot) in the lottery result that triggered the transition to the game.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect, the character for determining the opening effect and the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) is the jackpot game. The jackpot game effect determined in accordance with the jackpot type in the lottery result that triggered the transition to is executed in the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game can be enjoyed in a manner that reflects the lottery result (the game state of the jackpot game) for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, when the game is in a promising jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player, if a specific reach presentation (in this embodiment, the normal reach presentation X1 to X5 of the selected character (see FIG. 58)) is a big hit, the opening and one round Then, the effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed for the effect character (selected character) of the normal reach effect that is the final image game effect. Thereby, in the case of an advantageous probability variation jackpot game, the player can continue to enjoy the effect on the effect character (selected character) in the jackpot game from the final image game effect while leaving the reverberation.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character effect data table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment. In FIG. 58, OP effect is an abbreviation for opening effect, and R scenario is an abbreviation for round game effect scenario.

  In the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 58, for example, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, which is an opportunity to shift to the jackpot game state. If the determination result for the variable game is a probable big hit, a specific character effect (effect character effect) for the selected character (effect character) is determined at the opening, and the selected character (effect character) is selected as a character for selecting a round game effect scenario. ) Is determined. That is, if the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the effect character (selected character) in the final variable game in both the opening and the first round on condition that it is a probable big hit. An effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, neither the effect character nor the selected character is displayed in the opening effect (the specific character effect (effect character effect) is not executed), and the effect character (selected character) is selected as a round game effect scenario. The production scenario is selected.

  In addition, in the super reach production Y1 to Y5 and the special reach production Z1 to Z5, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a promising big jackpot, the opening is the final image game performance. The effect for the character is determined, and the effect scenario for the selected character is selected as the round game effect scenario. On the contrary, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is usually a jackpot, the selected character is determined as the character in the opening effect, and the round game effect scenario is determined. A production character is determined as the character. As described above, by determining the character for the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario (character effect in one round) in the round game, the effect for the selected character in the opening and one round also in this embodiment. And the effect for the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is executed, and the execution other than the opening and the first round is restricted. Thereby, the player can expect the jackpot type, and can enjoy the jackpot game while paying attention to the opening effect character and the effect character executed in one round while considering the reach type. .

  In the present embodiment, the effect character effect (specific character) is executed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and execution in other than the opening and the first round is restricted. For example, when executing the promotion effect, When the game situation is advantageous to the player as in the case where the reserved consecutive resort is confirmed, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at timings other than the opening and the first round.

  Further, in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 and the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, the effect character may be the same as the selected character, but when the effect character is the same as the selected character, one round of the opening and opening / closing execution mode The effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed on both sides. In this case, it is also conceivable that the effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed only in one of the rounds of the opening and opening / closing execution modes.

  Further, when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a promising jackpot, the normal reach effects X1 to X5 are executed as the final image game effects in the variable game. In the case where the effect character effect is executed in both the opening and the first round, the effect character effect may be executed as a different effect in the opening and the first round. In this case, the player can enjoy different effects of the effect character (selected character) twice for the opening and the first round.

  In this embodiment, the round game effect scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game effect scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the case has been described where the opportunity game image effect is the final image game effect that was executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed, but is executed at a time other than the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. You may make it perform the specific character production with respect to the character in the opportunity game image production which had been performed in an opening and at least one of 1 round.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the sixth embodiment described above, the lottery in which the character for the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in the first round) are the triggers for the transition to the jackpot game. The case where it is defined according to the jackpot type (probable jackpot and normal jackpot) in the result was explained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described in the above, the 5th jackpot type and the 16R jackpot are divided into 5R jackpots and 16R jackpots, and the stage scenario (character effect in one round) is defined in the round game. This is different from the sixth embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, the character in the opening effect and the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) are defined according to the number of rounds.

  In this embodiment as well, as in the case of the sixth embodiment described above, the character for determining the opening scenario and the scenario for determining the scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) is the trigger for the transition to the jackpot game. The jackpot game effect determined according to the jackpot type in the lottery result and thus determined is executed in the jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game can be enjoyed in a manner that reflects the lottery result (the game state of the jackpot game) of the floating game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. For example, in the case of a 16R (probable change) jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous for the player, if a big hit is made in a specific reach production (normal reach production X1 to X5 of the selected character in this embodiment), normal reach in the opening and one round An effect character (specific character effect) for the effect character effects (selected characters) of effects X1 to X5 is executed. Thereby, in the case of an advantageous 16R (probable change) jackpot game, the player can continue to enjoy the final image game effect in the jackpot game while leaving the reverberation.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game character effect data table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment.

  In the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 59, for example, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, when the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the opportunity to shift to the jackpot game state When the lottery result for the changed game is a 16R jackpot, a specific character effect (effect character effect) for the selected character (effect character) is determined at the opening, and a selected character (character for selecting a round game effect scenario) is selected. A production character) is determined. In other words, if the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the effect character (selected character) in the final variable game in both the opening and the first round, on condition that it is 16R big hit An effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a 5R jackpot, the effect on the selected character and the effect character in the final image game effect is not determined in the opening, and the selected character (effect character) is selected as the character for selecting the round game effect scenario. ) Is determined.

  In addition, in the super reach production Y1 to Y5 and the special reach production Z1 to Z5, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 5R jackpot, the opening is the final image game performance. The effect for the character is determined, and the effect scenario for the selected character is selected as the round game effect scenario. On the contrary, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is 16R jackpot, the selected character is determined as the character in the opening effect, and the round game effect scenario is determined. A production character is determined as the character. Thus, by determining the character for the opening effect and the character for determining the scenario effect in the round game (character effect in one round), the effect for the selected character in the opening and one round also in this embodiment. The effect on the effect character in the final image game effect of the floating game is executed, and the opening and the execution other than one round are restricted, so that the player can expect the jackpot type. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to the characters of the opening and the effects executed in one round while considering the reach type.

  In the present embodiment, the effect character effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and the execution in other than the opening and the first round is restricted. When the game situation is advantageous to the player as in the case where the game is confirmed, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and the first round.

  Further, in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 and the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, the effect character may be the same as the selected character, but when the effect character is the same as the selected character, one round of the opening and opening / closing execution mode The effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed on both sides. In this case, it is also conceivable that the effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed only in one of the rounds of the opening and opening / closing execution modes.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a 16R jackpot, the normal reach effects X1 to X5 are executed as the final image game effects in the variable game. In the case where the effect character effect is executed in both the opening and the first round, the effect character effect may be executed as a different effect in the opening and the first round. In this case, the player can enjoy different effects of the effect character (selected character) twice for the opening and the first round.

  In this embodiment, the round game effect scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game effect scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the case has been described where the opportunity game image effect is the final image game effect that was executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed, but is executed at a time other than the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed. You may make it perform the specific character production with respect to the character in the opportunity game image production which had been performed in an opening and at least one of 1 round.

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the visual hindrance effect of the jackpot game effect determination process, the cumulative number of balls is estimated, and the specific number of ball display effects as the visual hindrance effect is a specific character whose main character is the selected character. The case where it was made not to be performed during the performance was described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by monitoring the accumulated number of balls in real time, while displaying the ball during the jackpot game, the specific ball number display effect is not performed during the execution of the specific character effect. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the outgoing ball display effect process executed by the audio lamp control device.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the ball display effect processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a ball display carryover flag that is set to ON in step S4005 described later is set to ON (step S4001). The output ball display carryover flag is a flag for displaying a specific number of ball display images after the end of the specific character effect, and when the accumulated number of balls is a specific number or more during execution of the specific character effect (steps S4002 and S4004). Yes), it is set to on (step S4005).

  When the output ball display carryover flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No), the cumulative number of balls that are counted in the ball counting process in step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is equal to or greater than the Nth specific number. Determine whether or not. Here, N is a positive integer. For example, the Nth specific number is 1000N.

  Here, in the payout counting process of the first embodiment described above, only the number of winning balls for winning in the variable winning opening 316 is added as the cumulative number of payouts. On the other hand, in the payout counting process of the present embodiment, as the cumulative number of balls to be played, the number of game balls to be launched (the number of out balls) at the time of the big hit game is a difference from the cumulative number of balls to be awarded to the variable winning opening 316 The so-called difference ball number is employed, and when the difference ball number exceeds a specific number, a specific number of ball display effects are executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of balls is counted by subtracting the number of game balls (out balls) at the time of the big hit game, the round game in which the cumulative number of balls is more than a specific number is accurately estimated. Since it is not easy, it is possible to display the appearance during the jackpot game by monitoring the cumulative number of appearances in real time in consideration of this point.

  When the accumulated number of balls is equal to or greater than the Nth specific number (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S4003, and when the cumulative number of balls is less than the Nth specific number (step S4002: No), The processing moves to step S3306.

  When the accumulated number of balls is equal to or greater than the Nth specific number (step S4002: Yes), the specific number set in the RAM 512 is updated from the Nth specific number to the N + 1th specific number (step S4003). That is, the MPU 51 changes the number of balls to be determined in the specific number of balls display to the next specific number. Here, the N + 1th specific number is, for example, the Nth specific number + 1000 (= 1000 (N + 1)).

  Next, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character effect is being executed (step S4004). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display timing of the specific number of ball display images overlaps with the execution timing of the specific character effect.

  When the specific character effect is being executed (step S4004: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the outgoing ball display carryover flag to ON (step S4005), and ends the outgoing ball display effect process. In other words, the MPU 51 carries on the display of the specific number of ball display images until the specific character effect ends by setting the output ball display carryover flag to ON.

  On the other hand, when the specific character effect is not being executed (step S4004: No), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 to a specific number-out display image display screen 86 (see FIG. 40B) (step). S3903). That is, when the specific character effect is not being executed, the MPU 51 displays the specific number appearance ball display image when the cumulative number of appearances reaches or exceeds the specific number.

  On the other hand, if the output ball display carryover flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific character effect has ended (step S4006). When the specific character effect has been completed (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the output ball display carryover flag to OFF (step S4007), and the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 is displayed as the specific number output ball display image display screen. 86 (see FIG. 40B) (step S3903).

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the specific character effect is executed during the execution of the specific number-of-balls display effect before executing the specific number-of-balls display effect that is a visual hindrance effect. When it is determined that the specific character effect is executed during the execution, the specific number-of-balls display effect is executed after the end of the specific character effect. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the visual recognition of the specific character effect being hindered by the specific number-of-balls display effect.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot game effect determination process, the visual hindrance effect is determined after the opening / closing execution mode effect is determined, and the visual hindrance effect is executed during execution of the specific character effect with the selected character as the main character. The case where it is prevented from being explained.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment determines the opening / closing execution mode effect after determining the visual hindrance effect, and prevents the visual hindrance effect from being executed during execution of the specific character effect having the selected character as the main character. Different from the first embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the sound lamp control device of the present embodiment, and FIGS. 62 and 63 are respectively referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table and 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment, a visual hindrance effect determination process for determining a visual hindrance effect is executed (step S4101), and then necessary for determining an opening / closing execution mode effect. Processing is executed (steps S4102 to S4105).

  In the visual inhibition effect determination process (step S4101), unlike the above-described first embodiment, the visual inhibition effect can be determined including one round. However, the round game that executes the visual hindrance effect is determined so that the promotion effect and the reserved consecutive villa confirmation effect are not executed in the same round, that is, the plurality of visual hindrance effects are not executed in the same round.

  When the round game for executing the visual hindrance effect is determined (step S4101), the MPU 51 determines the round game for executing the specific character effect for the selected character (step S4102). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines to execute the specific character effect in a round game that does not overlap with the round game that executes the visual hindrance effect, that is, the round game that does not execute the visual hindrance effect. For example, when a specific number of balls appearing display effect in two rounds, a reserved villa finalizing effect in three rounds, and a promotion effect in four rounds are executed as the visual recognition inhibition effects, the MPU 51 sets a specific character effect that does not execute the visual recognition inhibition effects as 1 Decide to run in rounds or 5 rounds. Whether the specific character effect is executed in one round or five rounds is determined by lottery or the like.

  Note that the MPU 51 may determine to execute the specific character effect in one round when the visual inhibition effect is not executed in one round. Further, the specific character effect may be executed as both the opening effect and the opening / closing execution mode effect.

  When the MPU 51 determines the round game for executing the specific character effect (step S4102), the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type and the selected character (step S4103), and according to the round game, the jackpot type and the selected character type for executing the specific character effect. Then, an opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for determining an effect to be executed in each round game in the opening / closing execution mode is determined (step S4104).

  62 shows a 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, and FIG. 63 shows a 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table.

  The 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 62 is a table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of 5R big hit. That is, when the jackpot type is 5R jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect using the same 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table without distinguishing between the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot. Of course, different 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination tables may be prepared for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect may be determined based on these tables.

  This 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character, and for each selected character, five effect scenario tables of 1R selected effect scenario table to 5R selected effect scenario table are set. Has been. For example, the 1R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1 is an effect scenario table selected when a specific character effect for the selected character is executed at 1R, and the 5R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1 has a specific character effect of 5R. It is an effect scenario table selected by. For example, when the round game for executing the specific character effect is one round, the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot, and the selected character is the character 1, the MPR 51 opens / closes execution mode effect for 5R. The “1R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1” in the determination table is determined.

  In FIG. 62, only the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for the character 1 is shown. Similarly, for the characters 2 to 9, five round games for executing the specific character effect for the selected character are different. A production scenario table is set. That is, in the present embodiment, since any one of the characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes five corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 9. Includes 45 production scenario tables.

  The 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 63 is a table referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of 16R big hit. The 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character, and 16 effect scenario tables of 1R selected effect scenario table to 16R selected effect scenario table are set for each selected character. ing. Note that FIG. 63 shows only the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for the character 1, but similarly for the characters 2 to 9, 16 round games for executing the specific character effect for the selected character are different. A production scenario table is set. That is, in this embodiment, since any one of the characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selection character, the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes 16 pieces corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 9 in total. 171 production scenario tables are included.

  In both the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table and the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, each effect scenario table includes an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter. The effect scenario type, round game effect character type, and scenario type counter are the same as those in the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. To do.

  On the other hand, in the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table and the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, the specific character effect for the selected character is always executed once in any round game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the player can always enjoy the specific character effect for the selected character in one jackpot game.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 61, when the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (step S4104), the MPU 51 determines an effect scenario in the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table determined in step S4104 (step S4104). Step S4105).

  In this embodiment, after determining the round game that executes the visual inhibition effect, the round game that executes the specific character effect for the selected character is determined while avoiding the round game in which the visual inhibition effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid that the specific character effect is inhibited from being recognized by the visual recognition effect.

  In the present embodiment, the specific character effect is executed once in any round of the round game. Therefore, the player can always enjoy the specific character effect for the selected character in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In this embodiment, the specific character effect is always executed once in any one of the round games in the opening / closing execution mode. However, when the game situation is advantageous for the player, for example, when the reserved villa is confirmed. In the case of a jackpot game that is advantageous for such a player, such as when the next jackpot is scheduled to be executed relatively, such as in the case of a promising jackpot, a specific character effect is executed. You may make it not. Thereby, the player can enjoy the jackpot game by paying attention to whether the specific character effect is executed in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode. If the specific character effect is not executed in the jackpot game because the game situation is advantageous to the player, the specific character effect may be performed a plurality of times in the next jackpot game. For example, the specific character effect may be executed in all the round games in the opening / closing execution mode, or the specific character effect may be performed in at least one of the opening and the ending in addition to all the round games in the opening / closing execution mode. You may make it perform. Thereby, when the specific character effect is not executed in the previous jackpot, the player can enjoy the specific character effect in the current jackpot game until the previous jackpot game. In addition, regarding the execution of the specific character effect in all round games in the open / close execution mode, it is a condition that the game situation is advantageous to the player as in the case of a probable big hit, as in the case where the reserved consecutive resort is confirmed Also good.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, a description may be given with reference numerals for the sake of convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration with the reference sign. It is not a thing. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
Image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), the special game, and Production means (such as 341) in which a game effect (a jackpot game effect, a variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effect includes a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed by the image display means (341) mainly using the specific selection subject as the game effect executed in the special game, and the image display. A visual inhibition effect that inhibits visual recognition of the effect executed in the means (341),
The effect execution means (51) has means for setting the specific selection subject image effect to be executed at a timing different from the visual inhibition effect in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, in the special game, the specific selection subject image effect for the specific effect subject selected by the player is executed at a timing different from the visual inhibition effect. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game without hindering the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix A2]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball),
The production execution means (51)
Executing the specific selection subject image effect at a first timing set in a first period in which a predetermined specific unit game among the plurality of unit games is executed;
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the visual hindrance effect is executed at a second timing set in a second period other than the first period in the special game.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to appendix A2, wherein the first period is a period during which a first unit game (one round) executed first among the plurality of unit games is executed.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the second period is a period in which a unit game other than the first unit game among the plurality of unit games is executed.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes A2 to A4, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in a specific unit game such as the first unit game. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the unit game in which the specific selection subject image effect is executed, the player may miss the specific selection subject image effect such as the selected character image effect by paying attention to the variable prize opening, for example. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A5]
The effect execution means (51) determines at least the first timing and the second timing when determining a first timing for executing the specific selection subject image effect and a second timing for executing the visual inhibition effect. If a part of the timings overlaps, one of the first timing and the second timing is re-determined to a timing at which the first timing does not overlap the second timing. Game machines.

[Appendix A6]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball),
The game according to appendix A5, wherein the effect determining means (51) determines the first timing and the second timing in a period during which any one of the plurality of unit games is executed. Machine.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes A5 and A6, the first timing and the second timing when at least a part of the first timing for executing the specific selection subject image effect and the second timing for executing the visual inhibition effect overlap. Is determined again at a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to avoid beforehand that the specific selection subject image effect is inhibited from being visually recognized by the visual inhibition effect. In addition, by determining the first timing for executing the specific selection subject image effect and re-determining the first timing as necessary, the specific selection subject image effect is not executed fixed to a specific unit game. The execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect is determined at random. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the image display means in order to confirm the specific selection subject image production, so that it is possible to actively appreciate the production for the selection subject other than the specific selection subject, An opportunity to confirm the goodness of the selection subject is given.

[Appendix A7]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball),
It further comprises duplication determination means (51) for determining whether the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect before the visual inhibition effect is executed,
When it is determined that the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect by the overlap determination unit (51), the effect execution means (51) is after the end of the specific selection subject image effect. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the visual hindrance effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment A7, it is determined whether the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect before the visual inhibition effect is executed, and the specific selection subject image is executed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect. When it is determined that the effect is executed, the visual hindrance effect is executed after the specific selection subject image effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to avoid beforehand that the specific selection subject image effect is inhibited from being visually recognized by the visual inhibition effect.

[Appendix A8]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games that give a player a game value,
The production execution means
Executing the specific selection subject image effect in a unit game period in which any one of the plurality of unit games is executed;
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the visual hindrance effect is executed in an interval period between the unit games.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment A8, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the unit game period, while the visual recognition effect is executed in the interval period between the unit games. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect and the execution timing of the visual inhibition effect from overlapping, and it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image effect from being disturbed by the visual recognition effect.

[Appendix A9]
The specific selection subject image effect is executed by the image display means (341) based on a multilayer layer image obtained by superimposing a plurality of images.
The visual hindrance effect is an image in which information notification images (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information are displayed on the image display means (341) in a layer visible in the multilayer image. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A8, wherein the game machine is an effect.

[Appendix A10]
The information notification image is an image (861) for notifying that an integrated value of the game value given to the player exceeds a predetermined game value in an execution period of one or more special games that satisfy a predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to appendix A9, characterized in that

[Appendix A11]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state. Gaming state (high probability mode),
The special game state transitions to a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) that is shifted to the first notification game state after the special game ends, and to the second notification game state after the special game is ended. And 2nd special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the information notification image is an image (831) that suggests or clearly indicates that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix A12]
A holding means (41) for holding the right to advance the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit;
A hold result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means (41);
Further comprising
The information notification image includes a determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means (412) that shifts to the special game state after the hold notification game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note A9 to Supplementary Note A11, which is an image (851) that suggests or clearly indicates this.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A9 to Supplementary Note A12, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image effect from being inhibited by various information notification images serving as visual recognition impediments.

[Appendix A13]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A12, wherein the visual hindrance effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operation position.

[Appendix A14]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state. Gaming state (high probability mode),
The special game state transitions to a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) that is shifted to the first notification game state after the special game ends, and to the second notification game state after the special game is ended. And 2nd special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the movable member operation effect is an effect that suggests or clearly indicates that the special game state is the second special game state.

[Appendix A15]
A holding means (41) for holding the right to advance the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit;
A hold result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means (41);
Further comprising
The movable member operation effect includes a determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means (412) that shifts to the special game state after the hold notification game is executed. The gaming machine according to appendix A13 or appendix A14, wherein the game machine is an effect that suggests or clearly indicates that the player is present.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A9 to Supplementary Note A15, the specific selection subject image effect is prevented from being obstructed by various effects such as a movable member operation effect, a promotion effect, and a reserved villa finalization effect that become a visual hindrance effect. it can.

[Appendix B1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
A specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) corresponding to a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), and a priority display image (871, displayed with priority over the selection subject) 872) is displayed, and the effect means in which a game effect (a jackpot game effect, a variable game effect) is executed in the special game and the notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result. (341 etc.) and
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effects include, as the game effects executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as a main body,
The execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect in the image display means (341) after the display of the priority display image in the image display means (341) until the display of the priority display image ends. A game machine, further comprising an effect determination means (51) for determining whether or not.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the priority display image is an abnormality notification image (871, 872) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine.

[Appendix B3]
The effect determination means (51) is the image display means (341) when the specific selection subject image effect is being executed in the image display means (341) when the display of the priority display image is started. The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or appendix B2, wherein it is determined that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix B4]
The effect determination means (51) displays the image when the execution start timing of the specific selection subject image effect comes from the start of display of the priority display image to the end of display of the priority display image. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B3, wherein it is determined that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect in the means (341).

[Appendix B5]
When it is determined by the effect determining means (51) that the specific selection subject image effect is executed, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B4, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed after the end.

[Appendix B6]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball),
When it is determined by the effect determining means (51) that the specific selection subject image effect is executed, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to appendix B5, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed in an undigested unit game among the plurality of unit games started after the end point.

[Appendix B7]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round game) that give a player a game value (game ball), and an ending that shifts after completion of the plurality of unit games,
The effect execution means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect in the ending when the effect determination means (51) determines that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect. A gaming machine according to appendix B5.

[Appendix B8]
When there is no undigested unit game among the plurality of unit games started after the display of the priority display image on the image display unit (341), the effect executing unit (51) The gaming machine according to appendix B7, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the ending.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes B1 to B8, the specific selection subject image effect is performed from the start of the display of the priority display image such as the abnormality notification image in the image display means until the display of the priority display image is ended. It is determined whether or not the image display means is executing. Therefore, it can be grasped whether the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered by the priority display image. Thereby, when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered by the priority display image, the compensation can be performed. For example, when the display of the priority display image is canceled because the abnormality is resolved when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is inhibited by the priority display image, the inhibited specific selection subject image effect is changed to the priority display image. After canceling the display, for example, it is possible to cope with an undigested unit game or ending. Thereby, even if it is a case where the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is inhibited by the priority display image, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game.

[Appendix B9]
The specific selection subject image effect is a normal specific selection subject image effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51) and a special specific selection subject image effect with a low probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51). And including
The effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341) when the effect determining means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B5 to appendix B8, wherein the special specific selection subject image effect is executed after completion.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment B9, when the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the display of the priority display image, the special specific selection subject having a low execution probability as the specific selection subject image effect after the display of the priority display image is canceled. An image effect is executed. That is, a rare effect or a premier effect for the specific selection subject is executed as compensation for the obstruction of the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect. Therefore, even when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered, it is possible to reduce feelings such as annoyance and dissatisfaction of the player at that time by executing the special specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix B10]
The effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341) when the effect determining means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note B5 to Supplementary Note B9, wherein after completion, whether or not to execute the specific selection subject image effect is determined by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B10, the specific selection subject image effect is executed by winning the lottery when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is obstructed. That is, even when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered, there are cases where the specific selection subject image effect is executed or not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a surprise feeling by executing the specific selection subject image effect after the display of the priority display image is finished, and to improve the interest of the special game.

[Appendix B11]
The game machine according to appendix B1, wherein the effect execution means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341) so that the specific selection subject image effect can be visually recognized.

[Appendix B12]
The production execution means (51)
The priority display image is displayed on the whole or substantially the entire display screen of the image display means (341);
The supplementary selection B11 is characterized in that the selected and selected main image effect is reduced in size than a display size before the priority display image is displayed and is executed in a predetermined partial area of the priority display image. The gaming machine described.

[Appendix B13]
The effect execution means (51) displays the priority display image superimposed on the display screen in a part of the display screen of the specific selection subject image effect in the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to appendix B11.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary notes B11 to B13, the priority display image is displayed on the image display means so that the specific selection subject image effect can be visually recognized. For example, the specific selection subject image effect is performed in a predetermined partial area of the priority display image by reducing the display size before displaying the priority display image, or the specific selection subject image in the image display means By displaying the priority display image superimposed on the display screen in a part of the display screen of the effect, it is possible to visually recognize even when the priority display image is displayed on the image display means. Accordingly, the player can enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game even when the priority display image is displayed on the image display means.

[Appendix B14]
Execution of specific selection subject image effect for executing the specific selection subject image effect in the next special game on condition that the effect determination means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect is being executed. Storage means (512) for storing information (specific character effect stock flag);
The effect execution means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect when the specific selection subject image effect execution information is stored in the storage means. .

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B14, as a compensation in the case where the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is inhibited by displaying the priority display image in the image display means, the amount that the visual recognition is inhibited in the next special game. The specific selection subject image effect is executed. Thereby, even if it is a case where the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is inhibited by the priority display image, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the next special game.

[Appendix B15]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state. Gaming state (high probability mode),
The special game state transitions to a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) that is shifted to the first notification game state after the special game ends, and to the second notification game state after the special game is ended. And 2nd special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix B14, wherein the storage unit stores the specific selection subject image effect execution information on condition that the second special game is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B15, on the condition that the second special game is being executed, if the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is inhibited by the priority display image, the visual recognition is inhibited in the next special game. A specific selection subject image effect is executed. That is, when it is assumed that the time for executing the next special game is relatively short, the specific selection subject image effect for the amount of the visual recognition being hindered in the next special game is executed. Thereby, the specific selection subject image effect for which the visual recognition is hindered is executed as the benefit of being the second special game, and the player can enjoy the benefit. Further, on condition that the second special game is being executed, compensation when the visual display of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered by displaying the priority display image on the image display means is compensation. It ’s hard to say that it can prevent things from happening first.

[Appendix B16]
The effect execution means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information stored in the storage means, thereby performing the specific selection subject image effect in the special game. When the execution is performed twice or more, the specific selection subject image effect executed based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information is executed as an effect different from the other specific selection subject image effects. A gaming machine according to B14 or Appendix B15.

[Appendix B17]
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games (round game) that shift to the player after the opening and give a game value (game ball) to the player,
The effect execution means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information stored in the storage means, thereby performing the specific selection subject image effect in the special game. The gaming machine according to appendix B16, wherein, when executed twice or more, the specific selection subject image effect executed based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information is executed at the opening.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B16 and Supplementary Note B17, when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is inhibited by the priority display image, when the specific selection subject image effect is executed twice or more in the next special game, The specific selection subject image effect executed as the compensation is executed as an effect different from other specific selection subject image effects. Therefore, the same specific selection subject image effect is executed twice or more, so that it is possible to suppress a feeling of getting tired of the specific selection subject image effect. In particular, the specific selection subject image effect executed as compensation is performed at the opening, so that the specific selection subject image effect is executed more than once in the plurality of unit games. It is possible to effectively suppress the feeling of getting tired of seeing. Further, the player can enjoy compensation as a privilege that compensation due to the obstruction of the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect by the priority display image is executed as an effect different from other specific selection subject image effects. , You can enjoy special games more.

[Appendix B18]
The specific selection subject image effect is a normal specific selection subject image effect with a high probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51) and a special specific selection subject image effect with a low probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51). And including
The supplementary execution means (51) executes the special specific selection subject image presentation as the specific selection subject image presentation executed based on the specific selection subject image presentation execution information. The gaming machine according to any one of B17.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note B18, when the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the display of the priority display image, the special specific selection subject image effect with a low execution probability is used as the specific selection subject image effect in the next special game. Executed. That is, a rare effect or a premier effect for the specific selection subject is executed in the next special game as a compensation for hindering the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect. Therefore, even when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered, it is possible to reduce feelings such as annoyance and dissatisfaction of the player at that time by executing the special specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix C1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image effect (variable game effect) is executed in the notification game that notifies the determination result, and a special game image effect (a jackpot game effect) is executed in the special game;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image effect and the special game image effect;
With
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games (round game) that shift to the player after the opening and give a game value (game ball) to the player,
The notification game image effect is an effect character such as a notification game specific effect main image effect (a super reach effect, a special reach effect, etc.) in which a specific effect agent (effect character) is mainly displayed among a plurality of effect agents (characters). Production)
The special game image effect includes a special game specific effect subject image effect (effect character effect) in which the specific effect subject is displayed in an active manner,
The effect execution means (51) is configured to notify that the opportunity game image effect that has been executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game state when the state is shifted to the special game state. In the case of a game specific effect main image effect, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first unit game executed first in the plurality of unit games. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C1, the special game specific effect subject image effect for the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect in the variable game is executed in the special game. Therefore, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific effect subject of the special game specific effect subject image effect in the notification game in the special game. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed at the opening of the special game or the first unit game. Therefore, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the special game in a relatively short time after the end of the notification game, in other words, in a relatively short time after the end of the trigger game image effect in the notification game. Therefore, in the state in which the remnant of the notification game specific effect main image effect such as the reach effect in the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game remains, the player is in the opportunity game image effect of the notification game. You can also enjoy a specific production subject in a special game. Thereby, it is possible to further enjoy the specific production subject in the special game.

[Appendix C2]
The effect execution means (51) is the special game specific effect subject image in at least one of the opening and the first unit game determined according to the type of the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect. The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the production is performed.

[Appendix C3]
The plurality of production entities include a first production entity belonging to a first production entity group and a second production entity belonging to a second production entity group different from the first production entity group,
The notification game specific effect subject image effect is the first notification game specific effect subject image effect when the specific effect subject is the first effect subject, and the case where the specific effect subject is the second effect subject. A second notification game specific effect main image effect,
The production execution means (51)
When the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the first effect subject, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the opening,
The game according to appendix C2, wherein the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the first unit game when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the second effect subject. Machine.

[Appendix C4]
The said effect execution means (51) is the special game in which, when there are a plurality of the specific effect subjects in the opportunity game image effect, a part or all of the specific subjects of these specific effect subjects are mainly displayed. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C2 or Supplementary C3, wherein the specific production subject image production is executed in the opening production.

[Appendix C5]
The effect determining means (51) is configured to display more than half of the effect actors of the plurality of effect agents as the notification effect specific effect subject image effect in the opportunity game image effect. In some cases, the gaming machine according to appendix C4, wherein the special game specific effect subject image effect in which more than half of the effect agents are displayed is executed in the opening effect.

[Appendix C6]
The effect executing means (51) executes the special game specific effect main image effect in at least one of the opening and the first unit game determined according to the type of the trigger game image effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, which is characterized.

[Appendix C7]
The notification game specific effect main image effect is a first notification game specific effect main image effect belonging to the first effect group and a second information game specific effect main image effect belonging to a second effect group different from the first effect group. Including
The production execution means (51)
When the opportunity game image effect is the first notification game specific effect main image effect, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the opening,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6, wherein the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the first unit game when the opportunity game image effect is the second notification game specific effect main image effect .

[Appendix C8]
The first notification game specific effect main image effect is an effect that is executed when a game time in the notification game is longer than the second notification game specific effect main image effect, according to appendix C7, Game machines.

[Appendix C9]
In the first notification game specific effect main image effect, the degree of expectation that the determination result in the determination means (41) shifts to the special game state is greater than the second notification game specific effect main image effect. The gaming machine according to Appendix C7, wherein the game machine is a high performance.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes C2 to C9, the special game specific production subject image production in the opening or the first unit game is performed according to the type of the opportunity game image production and the type of the specific production subject in the opportunity game image production. Executed. Thus, in the gaming machine, the special game specific effect main image effect related to the effect subject grouped according to the type of the trigger effect image effect and the type of the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the special game in a manner that reflects the opportunity game image effect in the notification game that has been a trigger for the transition to the special game. In particular, special game specific production subject image production in which multiple production actors appear as specific production subjects, such as all-cast reach, is enjoyed by the opening game, reflecting the opportunity game image production. Can do.

[Appendix C10]
The special game includes a first special game (5R normal jackpot game) and a second special game (16R probability variable jackpot game) having different advantages for the player,
The effect execution means (51) determines to execute the special game specific effect main image effect in at least one determined according to the type of the special game among the opening and the first unit game. A gaming machine as set forth in Appendix C1, characterized in that.

[Appendix C11]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state. Gaming state (high probability mode),
The first special game is to be shifted to the first notification game state after the end of the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C10, wherein the second special game is shifted to the second notification gaming state after the end of the second special game.

[Appendix C12]
The production execution means (51)
In the case of the first special game, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the first unit game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein in the opening of the second special game, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the opening.

[Appendix C13]
The gaming machine according to appendix C10, wherein the number of the plurality of unit games is different between the first special game and the second special game.

[Appendix C14]
The second special game executes a larger number of the unit games than the first special game,
The production execution means (51)
In the case of the first special game, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the opening,
The gaming machine according to appendix C10, wherein in the second special game, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the first unit game.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes C10 to C14, the special game specific production subject image production is executed in the opening or the first unit game according to the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special game in a manner that reflects the determination result of the variable game (the game state of the special game) that triggered the transition to the special game. For example, when the second special game state is more advantageous for the player, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed at the opening. This allows the player to use the special game as an opportunity game image effect in the opening that is executed before the unit game in the case of an advantageous second special game, that is, immediately after the end of the special game. You can enjoy a specific production in

[Appendix C15]
The effect executing means (51) executes effects other than the special game specific effect main image effect in the unit game executed after the end of the first unit game among the plurality of unit games. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C14.

  According to the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, it is possible to prevent the special game specific effect main image effect from being repeatedly executed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the special game specific effect main image effect only in the opening or the first unit game in which the reverberation in the notification game effect remains largely.

[Appendix C16]
In the unit game executed after the first unit game is completed among the plurality of unit games, the effect executing means (51) satisfies the predetermined game when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note C1 to Supplementary Note C15, wherein a specific production subject image production is executed.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment C16, in a unit game executed after the end of the first unit game in a predetermined condition, for example, when the specific production main body is the same as the selection main body selected by the player, the special game specific An effect-oriented image effect is executed. Therefore, the player can execute the special game specific effect main image effect in addition to the opening and the first unit game to check the special game specific effect main image effect for the specific effect subject in the notification game effect. It is possible to focus attention on the display means. As a result, it is possible to positively apprehend the performance for the production subject other than the specific production subject, and the opportunity to confirm the goodness of the production subject other than the specific production subject is provided.

[Appendix D1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image effect (variable game effect) is executed in the notification game that notifies the determination result, and a special game image effect (a jackpot game effect) is executed in the special game;
Effect execution means for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image effect and the special game image effect;
With
The notification game image effect is a specific effect subject image effect (effect character effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect) in which a specific effect subject (effect character) of a plurality of effect subjects (characters) is mainly displayed. Including
The special game image effect is a specific selection subject image effect (specific character) executed in the image display means (341) mainly by a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters). Production)
The effect execution means is that the trigger game image effect executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game state when the transition to the special game state is performed is the specific effect main image. In the case of an effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific selection subject image effect is executed on condition that the specific effect subject in the specific effect subject image effect is the same as the specific selection subject.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect that was executed at a predetermined timing is the same as the specific select subject, the specific effect subject (that is, the specific select subject) in the special game A specific selection subject image effect is executed for the. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific production subject (specific selection subject) that is attached to the player in the special game.

[Appendix D2]
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games that shift after the opening ends and give a player a game value,
The effect execution means (51), when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject, the opening and a specific unit game predetermined among the plurality of unit games At least one of the game machines according to appendix D1, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, the special selection subject image effect of the special game is executed at least one of the opening and the specific unit game. Therefore, the player can also enjoy the specific effect subject (specific select subject) in the opportunity game image effect of the variable game that has become the opportunity for the transition to the special game even in the special game.

[Appendix D3]
When the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject, the effect determining means (51) performs the specific selection subject image effect in both the opening and the specific unit game. The gaming machine according to attachment D2, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

[Appendix D4]
The specific selection subject image effect includes a first specific selection subject image effect and a second specific effect subject image effect different from the first specific selection subject image effect,
When the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific select subject, the effect executing means (51) executes the first selected subject image effect in the opening, and the specific unit game The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the second selection subject image effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D3 and Supplementary Note D4, the special selection subject image production of the special game is executed in both the opening and the specific unit game as a benefit that the specific production subject is the same as the specific selection subject. . For this reason, the player can change the specific effect subject (specific select subject) in the opportunity game image effect of the variable game that triggered the transition to the special game as a different effect in both the opening and the specific unit game. Can be enjoyed once.

[Appendix D5]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification game state (probability that the determination unit determines to shift to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state ( High probability mode), and
The special game state transitions to a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) that is shifted to the first notification game state after the special game ends, and to the second notification game state after the special game is ended. And 2nd special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
When the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific effect subject, the effect determining means (51) is configured on the condition that the special game state is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix D4, wherein the first specific selection subject image effect is executed in the opening, and the second specific selection subject image effect is executed in the specific unit game.

[Appendix D6]
Reserving means for reserving the right to advance the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
A hold result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means;
Further comprising
When the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject, the effect executing means (51) is a result of determination for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means. The first specific selection subject image effect is executed in the opening, and the first unit game in the specific unit game is executed on the condition that the special game state is transferred after the hold notification game is executed. 2. The gaming machine according to appendix D4, wherein a specific selection subject image effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D5 and Supplementary Note D6, in addition to the fact that the specific production subject and the specific selection subject are the same, the opening and the specific unit game The specific selection subject image effect is executed on both sides. That is, since the specific selection subject image effect is executed in both the opening and the specific unit game on the condition that it is the second special game or that the reserved consecutive resort is confirmed, the opening and the specific unit When the specific selection subject image effect is executed in both of the games, it can be known that the player is in an advantageous state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special game by paying attention to whether the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the specific unit game in addition to the opening in the special game.

[Appendix D7]
In the non-specific unit game other than the specific unit game among the plurality of unit games, when the specific effect main body in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection main body, the effect execution means The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein an effect other than the specific selection subject image effect is executed.

[Appendix D8]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification game state (probability that the determination unit determines to shift to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state ( High probability mode), and
The special game state transitions to a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) that is shifted to the first notification game state after the special game ends, and to the second notification game state after the special game is ended. And 2nd special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The production execution means (51) is configured on the condition that the special game state is the second special game state when the specific production subject in the opportunity game image production is the same as the specific selection subject. The gaming machine according to appendix D7, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed in a non-specific unit game.

[Appendix D9]
Reserving means for reserving the right to advance the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
A hold result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means;
Further comprising
When the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject, the effect executing means (51) is a result of determination for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means. In addition, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game on the condition that the special game state is transferred after the hold notification game is executed. A gaming machine according to D7.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendices D7 to D9, execution of the specific selection subject image effect on the specific effect subject (that is, the specific selection subject) other than the opening and the specific round is restricted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the specific selection subject image effect as a special effect that can be executed in the opening and the specific unit game. On the other hand, in a non-specific unit game on the condition that the special game state is the second special game state (for example, the probability variation game state) or that it is determined that the reserved game will be executed after the special game ends. The specific selection subject image effect is executed. That is, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game only when it is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in order to confirm whether the player is in an advantageous state, the player pays attention to whether or not the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game. Thus, the player can enjoy the special game by paying attention to the effect in the non-specific unit game and confirming whether or not the player is in an advantageous state.

[Appendix D10]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D2 to appendix D9, wherein the specific unit game is a first unit game executed first in the plurality of unit games.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D10, after the end of the variable game, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in a series of flow from the opening to the first unit game (first unit game) in the special game. Therefore, the player has a series of the opening and first unit games from the end of the trigger game image effect in a state in which the afterglow of the trigger game image effect in the floating game that has been the trigger for the transition to the special game remains. A specific production subject (a specific selection subject) can be enjoyed even in special games.

[Appendix D11]
The specific selection subject image effect includes a normal specific effect subject image effect executed by the effect execution means (51) when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is different from the specific selection subject, and the opportunity game. The game according to appendix D1, further comprising a special specific effect subject image effect executed by the effect execution means (51) when the specific effect subject in the image effect is the same as the specific selection subject. Machine.

[Appendix D12]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification game state (probability that the determination unit determines to shift to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state ( High probability mode), and
The special game state transitions to a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) that is shifted to the first notification game state after the special game ends, and to the second notification game state after the special game is ended. And 2nd special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The production execution means (51) is configured on the condition that the special game state is the second special game state when the specific production subject in the opportunity game image production is the same as the specific selection subject. The gaming machine according to appendix D11, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed as the specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix D13]
Reserving means for reserving the right to advance the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
A hold result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means;
Further comprising
When the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject, the effect determining means includes the determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means. The specific selection subject image effect is executed as the specific selection subject image effect on the condition that a transition to the special game state is included after the hold notification game is executed, as described in appendix D11, Gaming machine.

[Appendix D14]
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games that shift after the opening ends and give a player a game value,
The effect execution means (51) is the first unit game executed first in the opening and the plurality of unit games when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject. The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note D11 to Supplementary Note D13, wherein the specific selective subject image effect is executed as the specific selection subject image effect.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D11 to Supplementary Note D14, the special specific selection subject image effect is executed on condition that the specific effect subject and the specific selection subject are the same. That is, the player can enjoy the special specific selection subject image production as a privilege that the specific production subject and the specific selection subject are the same.

[Appendix E1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
Image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), the special game, and Production means (such as 341) in which a game effect (a jackpot game effect, a variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effects include a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the selection subject as a subject, and the image display means as the game effect executed in the special game. A visual inhibition effect that inhibits visual recognition of the effect executed in (341),
The effect executing means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect before the execution of the visual inhibition effect, and does not execute the specific selection subject image effect after the execution of the visual inhibition effect. .

[Appendix E2]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein the visual hindrance effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operation position.

[Appendix E3]
In the visual inhibition effect, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information in a layer that can be viewed in a multilayer layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed is displayed on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to the supplementary note E1 or the supplementary note E2, which is an effect displayed in (1).

  According to the gaming machines according to supplementary notes E1 to E3, the specific selection subject image effect is executed before the execution of the visual inhibition effect, and the specific selection subject image effect is not executed after the execution of the visual inhibition effect. Therefore, the specific selection subject image effect can be used as an indication effect that the visual hindrance effect is executed. For example, the specific selection subject image effect can be a sign effect that the movable member operation effect is executed or the information notification image is displayed. Therefore, the player can predict that the movable member operation effect will be executed or the information notification image will be displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect. A special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether or not an image effect is executed.

[Appendix F1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
Image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), the special game, and Production means (such as 341) in which a game effect (a jackpot game effect, a variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect determining means (41) for determining the game effect to be executed by the effect means (341, etc.);
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect;
With
The game production is
As the game effect executed in the notification game, a notification effect specific effect subject image effect (super reach effect, special reach) in which a specific effect subject (effect character) among a plurality of effect subjects (characters) is displayed in an active manner. Including production character production such as production)
As the game effect executed in the special game, a special game specific effect subject image effect (specific character effect) in which the specific effect subject is mainly displayed and an effect executed in the image display means (341). A visual hindrance effect that hinders visual recognition,
The effect executing means (51) is determined to be executed by the effect determining means (51) and the transition to the special game state is triggered when the visual impairing effect is determined to be executed. When the triggered game image effect that has been executed at the predetermined timing of the notification game is the notification game specific effect main image effect, the specific selection main image effect is executed.

[Appendix F2]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the visual hindrance effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operation position.

[Appendix F3]
In the visual inhibition effect, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information in a layer that can be viewed in a multilayer layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed is displayed on the image display means (341). The game machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or Supplementary Note F2, wherein the game machine is an effect displayed in (1).

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes F1 to F3, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed when the opportunity game image effect is the notification game specific effect main image effect when the visual hindrance effect is scheduled to be executed. Therefore, the specific selection subject image effect can be used as an indication effect that the visual hindrance effect is executed. For example, the specific selection subject image effect can be a sign effect that the movable member operation effect is executed or the information notification image is displayed. Therefore, the player can predict that the movable member operation effect will be executed or the information notification image will be displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect. A special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether or not an image effect is executed.

[Appendix G1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
Image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), the special game, and Production means (such as 341) in which a game effect (a jackpot game effect, a variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means to execute the game effect;
With
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games (round game) that shift to the player after the opening and give a game value (game ball) to the player,
The game effects include a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the selection subject as a subject, and the image display means as the game effect executed in the special game. A visual inhibition effect that inhibits visual recognition of the effect executed in (341),
The effect execution means (51) is configured to execute the specific selection in both the opening and a specific unit game determined in advance among the plurality of unit games before the execution of the visual impairment effect in the special game. A gaming machine characterized by executing a main image effect.

[Appendix G2]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the visual hindrance effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operation position.

[Appendix G3]
In the visual inhibition effect, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information in a layer that can be viewed in a multilayer layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed is displayed on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1 or the supplementary note G2, wherein the game machine is an effect displayed in (1).

  According to the gaming machines according to supplementary notes G1 to G3, the specific selection subject image effect is executed a plurality of times before the visual inhibition effect is executed. Therefore, it can be used as an indication effect that the specific selection subject image effect is executed a plurality of times. For example, it can be used that the specific selection subject image effect is executed a plurality of times as a sign effect that the visual hindrance effect is executed. For example, the execution of the specific selection subject image effect a plurality of times can be used as an indication effect that the movable member operation effect is executed or the information notification image is displayed. Therefore, the player can predict that the movable member operation effect is executed or the information notification image is displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect a plurality of times. A special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether the selection subject image effect is executed a plurality of times.

[Appendix H1]
A determination means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means (41);
Image display means (341) for displaying a specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by a player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), the special game, and Production means (such as 341) in which a game effect (a jackpot game effect, a variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341, etc.) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effect includes a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed by the image display means (341) mainly using the specific selection subject as the game effect executed in the special game, and the image display. A visual inhibition effect that inhibits visual recognition of the effect executed in the means (341),
In the special game, when executing the visual inhibition effect in the special game, the performance execution means (51) sets the timing for executing the visual inhibition effect, and then specifies the timing at a timing different from the timing for executing the visual inhibition effect. A gaming machine comprising means for setting a selection subject image effect to be executed.

[Appendix H2]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that give a player a game value (game ball),
The production execution means (51)
In the first timing set in a first period in which a unit game selected from the plurality of unit games is executed, the visual inhibition effect is executed.
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed at a second timing set in a second period other than the first period in the special game.

[Appendix H3]
The special game further includes an opening before executing a plurality of unit games,
The gaming machine according to appendix H2, wherein the second period is a period other than the unit game in which the visual impairment effect among the opening and the plurality of unit games is executed.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes H1 to H3, in a special game, a unit game in which a specific selection subject image effect for a specific selection subject selected by a player is different from a visual inhibition effect, for example, a visual inhibition effect is executed. It is executed in a unit game different from, or an opening. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game without hindering the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect due to the visual inhibition effect. In addition, the specific selection subject image effect is executed at various timings including the opening, although it is affected by the execution timing of the visual hindrance effect. Therefore, since it is necessary to pay attention to the image display means from the start of the special game when it is desired to see the specific selection subject image effect, it is possible to concentrate the player on the effect executed by the image display means. It becomes possible. This makes it possible for the player to entertain the effect intended by the gaming machine in the special game. For example, giving an opportunity to see an image effect for a selection subject other than the specific selection subject selected by the player, and giving a motivation to newly select a selection subject other than the currently selected specific selection subject as the specific selection subject Can do.

[Appendix H4]
In the visual inhibition effect, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information in a layer that can be viewed in a multilayer layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed is displayed on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H3, wherein the game machine is an effect displayed in (1).

[Appendix H5]
In the information notification image, in an execution period of one or more special games satisfying a predetermined condition, an accumulated value (cumulative number of balls) given to a player has a predetermined game value. The gaming machine according to appendix H4, wherein the gaming machine is an image (861) notifying that it has been exceeded.

[Appendix H6]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state. Gaming state (high probability mode),
The special game state transitions to a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) that is shifted to the first notification game state after the special game ends, and to the second notification game state after the special game is ended. And 2nd special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The gaming machine according to appendix H4 or appendix H5, wherein the information notification image is an image (831) that suggests or clearly indicates that the special game state is the second special game state.

[Appendix H7]
A holding means (41) for holding the right to advance the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit;
A hold result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means (41);
Further comprising
The information notification image includes a determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means (412) that shifts to the special game state after the hold notification game is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H4 to Supplementary Note H6, wherein the game machine is an image (851) that suggests or clearly indicates.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H4 to Supplementary Note H7, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image effect from being inhibited by various information notification images serving as visual recognition impediments.

[Appendix H8]
The effect means (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio covering the display screen in the image display means (341) is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepared,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix H1 to appendix H7, wherein the visual hindrance effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operation position.

[Appendix H9]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low probability mode) and a second notification in which the determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state. Gaming state (high probability mode),
The special game state transitions to a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) that is shifted to the first notification game state after the special game ends, and to the second notification game state after the special game is ended. And 2nd special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state, 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state),
The game machine according to appendix H8, wherein the movable member operation effect is an effect that suggests or clearly indicates that the special game state is the second special game state.

[Appendix H10]
A holding means (41) for holding the right to advance the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit;
A hold result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the hold means (41);
Further comprising
The movable member operation effect includes a determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means (412) that shifts to the special game state after the hold notification game is executed. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8 or Supplementary H9, wherein the game machine is an effect that suggests or clearly indicates that the player is present.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H8 to Supplementary Note H10, the specific selection subject image effect is prevented from being obstructed by various effects such as a movable member operation effect, a promotion effect, and a reserved villa finalization effect that become a visual hindrance effect. it can.

10: gaming machine 20: operation button 20a: operation switch 21: selection determination unit 21A: selection button 211: upper selection button 212: lower selection button 213: left selection button 214: right selection buttons 211a to 211d: selection operation switch 21B: Determination button 21Ba: Determination operation switch 26: Speaker 316: Variable winning opening 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display section 39: Movable accessory member 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
714: Selected character 74: Character selection screens 741-747: Character selection image 81: Round game effect screen 811: Round display image 812: Jackpot round number display image 813: Character introduction image 82: Button operation request screen 821: Operation button image 83: Promotion success production screen 84: Promotion failure production screen 85: Reservation consecutive villa confirmation display screen 86: Specific number display game display image display screen 87: Error occurrence image display screen

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result of the determination means;
An image display means in which a notification game image effect is executed in a notification game that notifies the determination result, and a special game image effect is executed in the special game;
Effect executing means for causing the image display means to execute the notification game image effect and the special game image effect;
With
The special game includes an opening and a plurality of unit games that shift after the opening ends and give a player a game value,
The notification game image effect includes a notification game specific effect subject image effect in which a specific effect subject of a plurality of effect subjects is mainly displayed,
The special game image effect includes a special game specific effect subject image effect in which the specific effect subject is mainly displayed,
The effect execution means is that the event game image effect that has been executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game state when the event is transferred to the special game state is the notification game specific effect. In the case of a main image effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first unit game executed first in the plurality of unit games.

Images